MFX-2200 & MFX-2700

Muratec
MFX-2700/MFX-2200
FACSIMILE SYSTEM
FIELD ENGINEERING MANUAL
MEG version 1
(12 March 2007)
MURATA MACHINERY, LTD

COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT DIV.
Safety Information
LED Safety Label
A LED safety label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.
Battery Precautions
Important: Muratec does not recommend the independent replacement of the batteries. The batteries
are sold only as component parts of the Main Control PCB and Voice PCB, and cannot be
purchased separately from Muratec. Ni-MH (Nickel Metal Hydride) batteries are installed
inside the machine as back up memory batteries. Be sure to dispose of them according to
local, state and federal regulations.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturers instructions.
Il y a un danger d'explosion s'il y a un remplacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mme type ou d'un type recommand par le
constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformement aux instructions du fabricant.
Germany only
VORSICHT!
Explosinsgefahr bei unsachgemen austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom hersteller empfohlenen hnlichen typ. Entsorgung
gebrauchter Batterien nach angaben des herstellers.
Denmark only
Norway only
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering
Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandren.
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
Sweden only
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
Finland only
VAROlTUS
Paristo voi rjht, los se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hvit Kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
ALL Areas
CAUTION
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used IC Package according to the manufacturers instructions.
Germany only
VORSICHT!
Austausch nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen,
gleichwertigen typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
Table of contents
Safety Information...................................................................................................................................a
1 General Description.................................................................................1-1
1.1 Product Description........................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 Specifications.................................................................................................................................1-3
2 Machine Composition..............................................................................2-1
2.1 Document Scanning Sequence......................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Recording Section..........................................................................................................................2-6
2.3 Image Processing...........................................................................................................................2-7
2.4 Interconnect Block Diagram.........................................................................................................2-20
2.5 Block diagrams.............................................................................................................................2-22
2.6 Network Control Unit (NCU) PCB.................................................................................................2-24
2.7 Low Voltage Power Supply Unit (LVPS)......................................................................................2-25
2.8 High Voltage Power Supply ........................................................................................................2-26
3 Adjustment Procedures...........................................................................3-1
3.1 Field Service Program Modes........................................................................................................3-1
3.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment.....................................................................................................3-3
3.3 Memory Switch Adjustment..........................................................................................................3-62
3.4 Setting Individual Autodialer Attributes.........................................................................................3-84
3.5 Unique Switch Adjustment...........................................................................................................3-88
3.6 Clear Programmed Data / User Settings....................................................................................3-110
3.7 All RAM Clear.............................................................................................................................3-110
3.8 T.30 Monitor...............................................................................................................................3-111
3.9 Printer maintenance mode.........................................................................................................3-116
3.10 Monitor speaker........................................................................................................................3-117
3.11 Test Modes...............................................................................................................................3-117
3.12 Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switch and .....................................................................3-122
Unique Switch Settings............................................................................................................3-122
3.13 Factory Functions.....................................................................................................................3-122
3.14 Line Tests.................................................................................................................................3-128
3.15 Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode.................................................................................................3-131
3.16 Consumable order sheet..........................................................................................................3-132
3.17 DRAM Clear.............................................................................................................................3-136
3.18 Clear Life Monitor.....................................................................................................................3-136
3.19 Clear Optional Data..................................................................................................................3-136
3.20 Set Service Code.....................................................................................................................3-137
3.21 Life monitor maintenance.........................................................................................................3-138
3.22 Sensor input test......................................................................................................................3-140
3.23 Printer diagnostic mode............................................................................................................3-142
3.24 Network service mode..............................................................................................................3-142
3.25 Flash Rom Sum Check............................................................................................................3-143
3.26 Printer registration adjustment.................................................................................................3-144
3.27 Set Service Report...................................................................................................................3-144
3.28 Reset Printer Trouble...............................................................................................................3-146
3.29 Cleaning mode.........................................................................................................................3-146
3.30 Voice test..................................................................................................................................3-146
3.31 Network Switch.........................................................................................................................3-147
3.32 Security function maintenance.................................................................................................3-147
3.33 Measuring the black ratio.........................................................................................................3-147
3.34 Service function menu..............................................................................................................3-148
3.35 Quick Initial settings.................................................................................................................3-148
3.36 Update the software.................................................................................................................3-150
4 Troubleshooting Procedures...................................................................4-1
4.1 Troubleshooting Outline.................................................................................................................4-1
4.2 Mirror Carriage Error......................................................................................................................4-1
4.3 Recording Paper Jam.....................................................................................................................4-2

4.4 Document Feeder Jam...................................................................................................................4-3

4.5 LCD Failure....................................................................................................................................4-7
4.6 Machine malfunction......................................................................................................................4-8
4.7 The Image Quality Problems........................................................................................................4-16
4.8 Service Call Error.........................................................................................................................4-28
4.9 Error Codes..................................................................................................................................4-33
5 Maintenance & Adjustment......................................................................5-1

5.1 Maintenance schedule...................................................................................................................5-2
5.2 Re/Disassemble.............................................................................................................................5-3
5.3 Adjustment.................................................................................................................................5-136
6 Section 6 Options....................................................................................6-1
6.1 Paper cassette...............................................................................................................................6-1
6.2 Conformation Stamp......................................................................................................................6-4
6.3 Page Counter.................................................................................................................................6-5
6.4 PCL printer controller.....................................................................................................................6-6
6.5 OfficeBridge Expansion kit.............................................................................................................6-8
6.6 Network Interface Board...............................................................................................................6-10
6.7 Scanner heater.............................................................................................................................6-12
6.8 Cassette heater............................................................................................................................6-14
ii
1 General Description
1.1 Product Description
The MFX-2700
and MFX-2200 are

Multi-function product
s
with flat
bed scanner and Group 3 and

V.34 HDX modem facsimile machine. Documents are printed on plain paper using dry electrophotographic printing.
1.1.1 Parts names and descriptions

1
2 3
8
16
9
10
15
11
12
14
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Auto Documet Feeder (ADF)

ADF cover release lever
ADF cover
Document guide
Document tray
Document output area
Document output extension tray
Fuser cover
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1-1
Right cover
Right cover release lever
Bypass tray
Lower right covers (paper cassette)
Paper lever indicator
Paper cassette
Front cover
Control panel
17
18
22
19
20
21
17 Platen cover
18 Document pad
19 Document glass
20 Paper loading guide

21 Extention tray
22 ADF glass
23
24
25
31
26
27
32
30
28
29
23
24
25
26
27
Paper output area

Ventilation slot
Power switch
Power jack
Handset jack
28
29
30
31
32
External telephone line jack

Telophone line jack
USB port
10Base-T/100Base-Tx port
Additional phone line jack
1-2
1.2 Specifications
Item
Type
Telephone network
Compatibility
Coding method
Modem speed
Dual Access
LCD
Scanning method
Recording method
Acceptable document size
ADF capacity
Scanning resolution
Specifications / Comments
Desktop type
PSTN (Public Switched Telephone Network) or equivalent.
ITU-T T.4 and T.30
ITU-T-standard MH, MR, MMR and JBIG
33600, 31200, 28800, 26400, 24000, 21600, 19200, 16800, 14400,
12000, 9600, 7200, 4800 and 2400 bps
Allows up to three simultaneous operations.
LCD: 15 characters x 5 lines (Touch panel : bottom line only)
Language: English and Chinese
Black and White
Dry electrophotographic (LED) printer
<ADF>

Single sheet
Two or more sheets
Max:
297 (W) x 432 (L) mm 297 (W) x 420 (L) mm
Min:
120 (W) x 100 (L) mm 148 (W) x 105 (L) mm
Paper weight: 35 128 g/m2
52 105 g/m2
Thickness: 0.05 0.15 mm
0.07 0.12 mm
<FBS glass>
Max:
297 (W) x 420 (L) mm
Min:
No limit
A4 : 50 sheets, B4 : 40 sheets, A3 : 30 sheets
Paper weight: 75.0 g/m2
<Transmission>
horizontal x vertical (in dots/inch x in lines/inch)
Normal:
203 x 98
Fine:
203 x 196
Super fine: 406 x 392* or 600dpi 600lpi
Grayscale: 203 x 196
*: In the case that the remote fax has the ability of 406 x 392. If not, the
superfine resolution is 203 x 392, and the grayscale resolution in feeder
transmission is 203 196.
Effective Scanning width

Transmission speed
Document Memory
Document memory
backup
Printing resolution
<Copy>
600 x 600 dpi
<Scanner>
200 dpi 200 dpi x 200 lpi
294 mm (Fax), 297 mm (Copy)
Under 3 seconds (Super G3)
Based on transmission of ITU-T Test Document 1 to a Muratec fax
machine.
Standard:
64 MB (4600 pages)
(Total memory capacity: Backup time)

64 MB: 72 hours
The backup battery requires about 24 hours to reach full charge after
power to the fax unit is restored.
600 dpi
1-3
Item
Printing speed
Toner yield
Drum yield
Print margin
Acceptable recording
paper
Recording paper capacity
Receive paper tray

capacity
Printouts exit
Environmental conditions
Power requirements
MFX-2200
MFX-2700
Simplex print : 27 ppm
22 ppm
Dupex print :
16 ppm
18 ppm
(When loading A4-sized paper from 1st paper cassette.)

Approx.
20,000 sheets
(Letter, 6
%
document
coverage under 3-pages interval printing.)

Approx. 10
0
,000 pages
(Letter, 6
%
document
coverage under 3-pages interval printing.)

Reading edge, Trailing edge, Left edge and Right edge: 3
mm
Simplex printing
<Paper cassette>
A3, A4, A4(LEF), A5, A5(LEF), B4, B5, B5(LEF), F4, 8K, 16K,
16K(LEF), Letter, Letter(LEF), Legal, 11x17, Half-letter, Half-letter(LEF),
Executive, Executive(LFE)
Paper weight: 60 90g/m2
<Bypass tray>
Plain paper:
A3, A4, A4(LEF), A5, A5(LEF), B4, B5, B5(LEF),
Postcard, F4, 8K, 16K, 16K(LEF), Letter, Letter(LEF),
Legal, 11x17, Half-letter, Half-letter(LEF), Executive,
Executive(LFE)
Envelopes:
DL, COM10, Monarch
Transparency
Custom size: (90 297 mm) x
(140 432 mm) (Width x
Length)
Duplex printing
Plain paper:
A3, B4, A4, A4
(LEF), B5, B5(LEF)

, A5(LEF)
<Paper cassette>

500 sheets
<Bypass tray>

Plain paper:
100 sheet

Postcard/Transparency: 30 sheets

Envelopes
10 sheets
Approx. 250 sheets
Face down
Ambient temperature: 10 C to 32 C
Relative humidity: 20 % to 80 % with no condensation
22
0 VAC

10
%; 50
Hz
1-4
Item
Power
consumption
Dimensions
Weight
Optional
products
Speep mode:
8.5 W
Lower power mode:
20 W
Standby:
57 Wh
Memory Transmission: 21 W
Reception:
920 W
Copying:
920 W
Maximum:
920 W
Standard:
597.2 mm (W) x 679.7 mm (D) x 581 mm (H)
Maximam:
597.2 mm (W) x 679.7 mm (D) x 953 mm (H)
Approx. 55.4 kg (1st cassette and cartridges excluded)

Second, third and fourth paper cassette

PCL printer controller

Mechanical page counter

Network interface board

OfficeBridge board

Conformation stamp

Condensation countermeasure kit (for the paper supply unit)

Condensation countermeasure kit (for the scanner unit)

Cabinet
1-5
2 Machine Composition
45 6
3
2
1
42
10
11
41
40
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
39
38
37
36
35
34
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Feed roller
DS2
Press roller
DRS
Exit roller
Separator roller
DW2
DW1
DL1
Lens
CCD
Exit roller A
Exit roller B
Cleaning roller
Heat roller
Lamp Heater
Press fuser roller
Cleaner blade
Charge unit
OPC drum
LED head
33 32 31
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Transfer roller
Magnet roller
Regist roller
Regist shaft
Pickup MP roller
Separator roller
Ritard roller
Pickup roller
Feed roller
Agitator paddle
Agitator screw A
Agitator screw B
Toner screw B
Toner agitator paddle
Toner screw A
Ozone filter
Fan
Mirror C
Mirror A
Mirror B
Lamp
2.1 Document Scanning Sequence

2.1.1 ADF Detection
When a document is placed into the document feeder, Document Sensor 1 (DS1) is activated and you
will hear the short beep. The width of document is detected by DW1and DW2 and length of document
is detected by DL1sensor.
The document will be transferred when the start key is pressed. The motor drives clutch 1 (CL1) with
the gear for the pick up roller to turn.
Document separation is the process that allows a multi-page document to go through the scanner one
page at a time. The bottom document is separated from the remaining documents by the friction of the
separator pad.
Following the document separation, the separate roller causes the document to advance. During this
feed, clutch 2 (CL2) is set to off not to supply power of the motor to the feed roller. A loop is made
by the transfer roller, which prevents the document to skew. As it advances, the leading edge of
the document activates the DS2 sensor. Once DS2 is activated, the feed roller continues to rotate
until the document reaches the scan position. The machine uses the distance from DS2 to the scan
position and the diameter of the feed roller to determine the number of rotations necessary to feed the
document to the scan position.
When the document reaches the scan position, the light from the scanner lamp strikes the face of the
document and is reflected into the lens through mirrors A, B, and C. In case the light intensity along
the length of the scanner lamp is not uniform, shading compensation is provided to ensure even
illumination.
As the reflected image passes through the lens, it is focused onto the charged coupled device (CCD).
The CCD then converts the dark and light areas of the image into electrical impulses, or image data.
When DS2 detects the trailing edge of the document, the image signal output is turned off. The
scanner continues to remain active for a few more seconds in case there is another document to
follow.
The scanned document is discharged through the document exit by the exit roller.
Document detection (ADF)
The sizes of the documents are detected by the following two sensors;
Detection
Document presence
Leading and trailing edge
detection
Document size detection
length
width
Action
Detects whether there is a document

on the tray or not
Detects the leading and trailing edge of
the feeding document
Sensor
DS1
DS2, DRS
Detects the length of the document on

DL1
the tray
Detects the width of the document on the DW1, DW2
tray
2.1.2 FBS section

The FBS (Flat Bet Scanner) section consists of document glass (pain), the optical reading section
(Carriage A Assy, Carriage B Assy and scanner frame Assy) and scanner driving section.
The document size detection stars when the BIS sensor is on. The detection of whether the FBS
cover is closed is made by the APS sensor.
Light reflected from the original passes through three mirrors and a lens to form a reduced image on
the CCD Sensor as the Scanner Motor moves the Scanner. The CCD sensor converts the light pattern
(image data) into an electrical image signal.
The electrical image signal is then output to the Main Board.
Exposure Section: Construction and Function
3
1 Reflector Tape
The Reflector Tape reflects the light from the Exposure Lamp and supplements its illumination.
2 Exposure Lamp
A Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp (CCFL) is used to illuminate the original.
3 Mirror
Directs the reflected light from the original to the lens.
Scanner frame Moving Mechanism

<Carriage A>
During a scan, the Carriage A projects an even amount of light from the Exposure Lamp onto the
entire surface of the original. The light is reflected from the original to the Mirror A of the Carriage A
and then to the Mirror B and Mirror C of the Carriage B.
The Carriage A is driven by the FBS Motor and front and rear Scanner Drive belts.
Scanner speed is determined by the set zoom ratio in reference to the full size mode.
The Carriage A is at home position when Scanner Home Position Sensor is blocked. This position
serves as the reference for the scan motion.
<Carriage B>
The Mirror B and Mirror C are mounted to their holder at right angles to each other. They direct the
light reflected off the Mirror A through the lens to the CCD.
The Carriage B is also moved by the Scanner Drive belts and pulleys driven by the FBS Motor.
It travels at a speed half that of the Carriage A, thereby keeping constant the optical path length
between the Original Glass and lens.
5
3
2
9
10
13
11
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
APS sensor
BIS sensor
Caridge B
Document size detection sensor
FBS motor
Inverter
Lens
8
9
10
11
12
13
PCB CCD
Caridge A
Lamp
Mirror A
Home sensor
Mirror B and C
Document size detection (FBS)

When the machine is in Auto Paper or Auto Size, the document length detecting sensor mounted in
the FBS section receive light reflected off the original to allow the machine to determine the document
length size.
And the CCD detects document width by reflecting light from the Exposure Lamp.
Document size
A4
A4
A5
A5
B4
B5
B5
A3
Multi Beam Sensor

(Length detection)
CCD
(Width detection)
: Means that the unit is used.
2.2 Recording Section

Recording Paper Feed Path
A sheet of the recording paper is separated from the remaining paper by the friction of the pickup
roller.
The paper is moved along the paper guide until it reaches the register roller, then fed by the rotation
of the register roller.
In duplex printing, the machine can print both sides of the paper (duplex printing).
When the first side of the paper is printed, it is transferred to the exit. However after a few steps after
Switchback (SWBK) sensor detected the trailing edge, the exit roller rolls in reverse and the paper is
transferred to the image processing area by the duplex rollers.
It reaches to the image transfer area turned inside out, and the duplex side of the paper is printed.
2.3 Image Processing

The fax incoming data, copy data or pirnt data is sent to the printer for image processing.
12. Paper Exit
11. Fusing
9. Cleaning
10. Erase
2. Drum Charging
8. Discharge Plage
3. LED Exposure
1. OPC Drum
4. Development
7. Image Transfer
6. Manual Bypass
5. Paper Feed
The image processing is roughly divided into the following steps:

1. OPC Drum
Changes the image of the original projected onto the surface of the OPC drum to a corresponding
electrostatic latent image.
2. Drum Charge
Generates a negative DC charged layer on the surface of the OPC Drum.
3. Drum Exposure
The LED light strikes the surface of the OPC Drum, creating an electrostatic latent image.
4. Development
Negatively charged toner adheres to the latent image on the OPC Drum surface. DC negative bias
voltages are applied to the Sleeve/Magnet rollers, thereby preventing toner from sticking to the
background.
5. Paper Feed
Feeds sheets of paper from the appropriate paper source.
6. Bypass Paper Feed
Feeds sheets of paper from the bypass source.
7. Image Transfer
A positive charge is applied to the Transfer roller to transfer the visible image on the surface of the
OPC Drum onto the paper.
8. Discharge Plate
The discharge plate removes the potential charge from paper.
9. Cleaning
Residual toner is scraped off the surface of the OPC Drum.
10. Erase
The OPC Drum is exposed to light, which effectively neutralize any residual charge on the surface
of the OPC Drum.
11. Fusing
Heat and pressure fuse toner on the paper .
12. Paper Exit
Feeds paper out of the MFP onto the exit tray.
2.3.1 LED exposure

Location of the unit
The LED exposure area depends on the paper size. The image lacks each edge of the paper for 3mm
because of non-exposure area.
3mm
3mm
3mm
3mm
2.3.2 Drum Cartridge

The drum cartridge consists of charge section / drum / developing section / cleaning section.
4 5
6
7
8
10
1
2
3
4
5
Eraser
Charge unit
Waste toner screw
Cleaner blade
Waste toner paddle
9
6
7
8
9
10
OPC Drum
Magnet roller
Agitator paddle
Agitator screw A
Agitator screw B
2.3.3 Drum charge

The OPC Drum Charge Corona has a grid mesh to deposit a charge evenly across the surface of the
OPC Drum.
The corona unit has a comb electrode that discharges only toward the grid mesh, thus minimizing
the amount of ozone produced.
2.3.4 Development
The toner supplied from the toner cartridge is stirred by the agitator and paddle, and is transferred to
the developing roller.
The developing roller consists of a magnet roller and a sleeve roller turning around it. The developing
roller transfers the toner to the OPC drum.
The toner on the drum surface is controlled by the developing bias on the developing roller.
ATDC sensor
The ATDC sensor is at the bottom of the toner cartridge. The toner density (T/D) in the developing unit
is detected by a magnetic permeability sensor. When the toner density becomes low, the RX motor
rotates the screw in the toner hopper and supplies the toner to the developing unit. The sensor is
adjusted when the drum cartridge is replaced.
2.3.5 Cleaning the OPC drum

The cleaner blade is pressed against the OPC drum surface to scrape toner off the surface.
The eraser lamp lights the drum surface to neutralize the potential of the OPC drum after the image
transfer.
3
1
2
Eraser
Charge unit
OPC Drum
2.3.6 Toner Cartridge

Toner cartridge structure

The toner in the toner cartridge is transferred to the screw by the toner agitator paddle sheet which is
on the toner agitator paddle. The paddle rotates by TP motor. The toner screw A is also rotating and
transfers the toner to the discharger.
4
1
2
Toner agitator paddle

Toner agitator paddle sheet
3
4
Toner screw A
Discharger
Toner hopper structure

A piezoelectric vibrating sensor detects the remaining toner. The toner is stirred by the agitator. The
toner in the hopper is transferred to the drum cartridge by the rotating screw.
2
3
1
2
Toner sensor
Agitator
Screw
Waste Toner collection

The toner pressed against the OPC drum is scratched by the cleaning blade, and transferred to the
waste toner collection area located at the bottom of the toner cartridge by the waste toner collection
screw. The toner in the collection area is design to accumulate evenly by the toner screw B.
1
2
Opening
Toner screw B
Toner transferring mechanism
2
1
4
5
1
2
3
Toner cartridge
Toner hopper
Toner supply route
4
5
Drum cartridge
Toner collection route
2.3.7 Image Transfer

Structure
A charge is applied to the Transfer roller to transfer the toner image formed on the surface of the OPC
drum onto the paper.
The image transfer current is controlled according to the size and type of paper ,whether the copy
cycle is 1-sided or 2-sided, temperature and humidity .
The surface of theTransfer Roller is cleaned by applying the same negative polarity as the toner.
Discharger Brush
To neutralize any charge potential left in the paper which has undergone the image transfer stage,
there is the Discharge Brush fitted to the guide plate after the Transfer Roller.
Drum Scrapers
The drum scrapers mounted in the drum cartridge properly separate paper from the surface of the
OPC drum.
2.3.8 Fusing
The toner image transferred on to the paper is securely fixed.

A heat roller system is used as the fusing system. The heat roller is heated by the lamp heater inside
the roller. The toner image is securely fixed by the pressure between the heat roller and press fuser
roller.
A thermistor detects and controls the heater rollers temperature.
9
1
2
3
4
5
Cleaning roller
Heat roller
Paper separate blade
Fused toner
Press fuser roller
7
6
7
8
9
Paper
Non-fused toner
Lamp heater
Thermistor
The cleaning roller cleans the dirt of the heat roller. It is driven by the heat roller and rotates at a
circumferential velocity of 0.625 times faster than the heat roller.
2
1
2
3
Press roller
Heat roller
Thermostat
4
4
5
5
Thermistor
Thermal fuse
2.3.9 Paper supply

The main motor drives the pickup roller and the paper feed roller to supply paper.
The pickup roller transfers the paper and the paper feed roller and separate roller separates one sheet
of paper and fed into the main unit.
When the paper cassette is closed, the lever is pushed to lower the pickup roller.
The Liftup upper limit sensor detects the upper limit position when the paper lifting plate is raised.
The paper empty sensor detects when paper in the cassette runs out.
1
2
3
5
4
1
2
3
Lever
Pickup roller
Liftup upper limit sensor
4
5
6
Paper feed roller

Separate roller
Paper empty sensor
HEATER LAMP(A3)
Thermal cut off
Thermal cut off
THERMISTER(A3)
Fusesr (A3)
Moscow Cable Diagram
PRINTER UNIT
LCD
EXTEL
TEL
PCB NCU DAA

LINE
LED HEAD
THERMISTER (A3)
(A3)
Hibrid connector 1B
(A3)
Pxx
PCB PANEL B
Hibrid connector1A
26
P5
40 FFC
CN2
P1
+24V:(3,4,5,6)
+5V:(11,12)
+3.3V:(13,14)
GND:(7,8,9,10,15,16)
P2
+5V:(37,38,41)
PCB VOICE
GND:(17,18)
+5V:(1)
+3.3V:(15,16)
PCB PANEL A
+3.3V:(1)
GND:(14,15)
28
12
28
16
32
16
PCB CONN PCL
PCB DPRAM I/F
+24V:(66)
+5V:(43)
+3.3V:(67,68)
GND:(3,7,11,15,19,23,31
35,47,51,55,59,63)
PCB EXT LINE 2
FLASH WRITER JIG
+3.3V:(21,22,25)
GND:(4,8,12,16,20,28,36,44,48)
PCB LIME
PCB PCL
P3
+5V:(37,38,41)
+3.3V:(21,22,25)
GND:(4,8,12,16,20,28,36,44,48)
P4
P6
PCB LPH
CN1
40 FFC
LPS
Pxx
+4V:(24,25)
+5V:(14,15)
+3.3V:(10,11)
GND:(12,13,16,17,26,27)
PCB NCU DAA
68
P23
+24V:(1,3)
+5V:(5)
+3.3V:(7)
GND:(21,23,25,27,29)
P22
P11
+5V:(3,4,5)
+3.3V:(1,2)
GND:(29,30,31,32)
P8
P18
5V:(1,2)
GND:(16)
P7
P6
P21
+3V:(1)
GND:(6)
P19
P20
+3.3V:(59,61,
10,13,22,30,40,41,42,43)
GND:(1,12,14,23,31,
33,34,36,37,58,60,72)
P13
+5V:(15,16,17)
+3.3V:(11,13,14)
GND:(18,19,20)
P12
GND:(2)
P14B
+24V:(1)
P14A
+5V:(40,45,46)
+3.3V(42,47,48)
+12V:(43,44)
GND:(1,9,17,25,33,41,49,50)
P9
+3.3V:2
GND:4
PCB MAIN
EXT MEMORY
26
14
15
FBS UNI T
P140B
PCB SCANNER
P140A
P149
P145
P146
P144
P143
P142
P141
P148
P147
HEATER
24V:(1)
MBS
5V:(1,4)
GND:(3,6)
SBS
5V:(6)
GND:(5)
BIS
APS
5V:(6)
GND:(2)
5V:(3)
GND:(2)
P1421
PCB CONN MOT
HOME SENSOR
P1420
14
15
+24V:(2,5)
FBS MOTOR (Bi HB)
PCB CCD
P180
+12V:(19,20)
+5V:(1,2)
GND:(4,6,8,10,12,13,14,16,18)
34
LAMP INVERTER
24V:(3)
GND:(1)
2nd CASSETTE
PCB CASSETTE
20 FCC
14
15
P1487
P1486
P1484
P1483
PCB ADF
P1480
P1481
+24V:(4,5,6)
+5V:(31,33)
+3.3V:(27)
GND:(1,2,3,7,8)
P1482
LAMP
4th CASSETTE
PCB CASSETTE
ADF UNIT
14
15
DS1
+5V:(3)
GND:(2)
DRS
+5V:(6)
GND:(5)
DS2
+5V:(3)
GND:(2)
STAMPER
+24V:(1)
DL2(DADFREG)
+5V:(10)
GND:(12)
DL1(DADFA3)
+5V:(7)
GND:(9)
DW2(DA3)
+5V:(6)
GND:(5)
DW1(DB4)
+5V:(3)
GND:(2)
TXIL
+5V:(7)
GND:(6)
ADF MOTOR (Bi HB)

+24V:(2,5)
DCLCRE
+24V:(3)
DCLCSE
+24V:(1)
2.4 Interconnect Block Diagram
DRUM UNIT(A3)
Drum cartridge(A3)
FUSE
Transfer Roller
PCB ERS
HV unit
+5V:(6)
GND:(5)
PES
Paper eupty sensor(2,3 CAS)
Lift up sensor
Jam sensor
Jam access cover sensor(2,3,4)
PCB DEV
ATDC sensor(A3)
Lift up(1st) (A3)
Paper empty sensor(1st CAS)

+5V:(3)
GND:(2)
/PES
GND:(10)
(non pole)
FAN(80mm)
counter(A3)
GND:(5)
+24V:(1)
DUP JAM SENSOR(A3)

+5V:(13)
GND:(12)
PCB BPSIZE
FCLCHH
paper feed solenoid(A3)

+24V:(1)
+24V:(5)
3 3
1 1
2 2
1 1
Paper empty sensor(BYPASS)

+5V:(5)
GND:(4)
/BP_PES
lift-up MOTOR(1st)
12
P4
P2
P1
PCB CASSETTE
P161
P179
P184
P169
P160
P158
P190
P157
P156
FCL_1
P173
paper resist clutch(A3)

+24V:(3)
+24V:(5,15)
+3V:(9)
GND:(7,14)
P155
P154
paper feed clutch(B4)

+24V:(1)
(A3)
Hibrid connector2A
P189
P172
(A3)
Hibrid connector2B
Paper suply sensor(A3)

+5V:(3)
GND:(2)
PSS
GND:(9)
CASOP,PSIZE(4bit Type)
Paper size seuser/Cassette open sensor(1st)(A3)
153P
P150B
20
P150A
PCB PRT
40
10
P15A
+5V:(33,34)
+3.3V:(26,31,32)
GND:(1,36,37,38,39,40,9,17)
P15B
+24V:(1,3,15,17,19)
GND:(5,7,9,11,13,18,20)
PCB MAIN
P3
P6
P5
P151
P166
P181
P165
P176
P185
P177
11
10
P186
P171
[e]
P188
P178
P175
P152
P187
P159
+24V:(11)
Lift MOTOR
CAS MOTOR
CASOP,PSIZ(4bit Type)
Paper size SENSOR
Jam access cover sensor(1st)

+5V:(9)
GND:(8)
/JCOP
+5V:(6)
GND:(5)
DUP switch back sensor(A3)
PDS
+5V:(3)
GND:(2)
tonoer MOTOR(A3)
+24V:(4)
TONER EMPTY(A3)
+5V:(4)
GND:(6)
Toner cartridge sensorON (A3)

+5V:(3)
GND:(2)
GND:(9)
PSU HV(A3)
GND:(3)
+5V:(1)
Thermistor(A3)
+24V:(5,7)
GND:(10)
PCB DUPLEX
GND:(1)
24V:(2)
FCL_2,3,4
SPEAKER
+24V:(1)
SCREW clutch(A3)
Safety interlock switch

+24V:(1,2)
PRT MOTOR-2[RX MOTOR] (DC)
PRT MOTOR-1[RX MOTOR] (DC)

24V:(2)
GND:(1)
Duplex feed roller
Discharger brush
Bypass tray flapper
EXIT roller
DUP clutch(A3)
DFG-S3S3B-520
DFG-S3S3B-530
DFG-S3S3B-508
DFG-S3S3B-509
chassis
chassis
chassis
chassis
2.5 Block diagrams
System Bus
-B
Lithium battery
Option
CODEC
(COMM)
RES. CONV
(COMM)
CODEC
(Scanner)
CODEC
(Printer)
USB 1.1 I/F
RES. CONV
(Smoothing)
Image Bus Controller
Power
Saved
System Bus Controller
IC2 MD0010 SYSTEM ASIC
POWER
SUPPLY
RJ11
IC6 MD0002
Image
Memory
Control
Option
NIC
NP-400
PCB SCANER
PCB CCD
IC5 AFE
IC2
CCD 600dpi
IC2 MD0008
IMAGE
PROCESSING
IC1
Driver.
IC1
Driver.
Inverter
Lamp
FBS
MOTOR
ADF
MOTOR
PRINTER
UNIT
PCB PRT
Main
MOTOR1
VIDEO I/F
LED I/F
PCB LPH
IC1
LPH control
CON
(*1) Cpmmected to the Ni-MH battery

(*2) Cpmmected to the Lithium battery
or
PCB ADF
IC13
256Mb-SDRAM
(Image Memory)
Gate
Compact
Flash Memory
PSU-200E
Option
PCL
OP-550
Gate
IC8 (*2)
1Mb-SRAM
Option
Office Bridge Pro
WS-550
Gate
Audio
Option
2ndLINE
NCU
RJ45
Ni-MH battery
Gate
System Bus
SPEAKER
Option
2ndLINE
MODEM
IC5 32Mb
FLASH ROM
IC9 (*1)
256Mb-SDRAM
(System Memory)
(Document Memory)
(ECM Buffer)
(MODEM Buffer)
PCB NCU DAA
RJ45
IC7 64Mb
FLASH ROM
EX memory (*1)
256Mb-SDRAM
IC35
MMD5020
MODEM V34
IC2
MSM6650
IC1 SH7706
CPU
Gate
LCD
PANEL-A
PANEL-B
PCBVOICE
RJ11
PCB MAIN
PCB PANEL
PCB CASSETTE
LED HEAD
Main
MOTOR2
HIGH VOLTAGE
POWER SUPPLY
Main Control PCB

The main control PCB controls the operations of all machine functions.
The modem modulates and demodulates the data, detects the control signal, and send DTMF signals.
It processes the rotation of the scanned image, fax received image and print image.
It transports the image in memory to the LPH PCB in serial data.
When a Compact Flash Memory Card is inserted to the socket and the machine is turned on, it
transfers the updating data to the SDRAM, and after the transferring writes the data on to the FLASH
memory.
It controls the High Voltage Power Supply.
Memory section:
LASH MEMORY --- The FLASH MEMORY contains all program instructions for unit operation,
F
the background level and all other parameters.
RAM --- The SRAM, which is backed-up by a lithium battery is used to store user programmed
S
information. When the jumper pin JP2 is removed, the stored information will be cleared.
DRAM --- The SDRAM is used for buffer the following items. It is backed-up by a Nickel-metalS
hydride battery on the Voice PCB.
Program data - W
hen the machine is turned on, the CPU operation data on the Flash
memory will be copied to SDRAM, and the program will be executed.
Program data - Encoded image data
Program data - Temporary memory for transmission
NOTE: The SDRAM back-up battery is connected to the Voice PCB. When the Main control PCB
is replaced, the connection will be lost. To remove the Main control PCB without loosing the
backed-up memory, do not remove the harness between Main control PCB and Voice PCB.
NOTE: When the jumper pin JP2 is removed and reinserted, be sure to clear all the data.
NOTE: When the harness between the Main control PCB and Voice PCB is removed and reinserted,
execute the DRAM Clear operation. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <6> and [Yes].)
Scanner PCB
The scanner PCB detect the sensors on the scanner.
It controls the drive motor.
It drives the FBS motor.
It controls the CCD.
It offsets and adjust the image signal (analog) from the CCD, converts AD, and processes the image.
ADF PCB
The ADF PCB detect the sensors on the ADF.
It controls the ADF drive motor.
CCD PCB
The CCD PCB scans the document with 600 dpi CCD, and transfer the image signal (analog) to the
Scanner PCB.
PRT PCB
The PRT PCB detect the sensors in the printer unit.
It controls the clutch.
LPH PCB
The LPH PCB changes the print serial data on the Main control PCB to a data format for LEDPrintHead, and transfer the data to the LED-Print-Head.
It reads the LED individual difference correction data, and adjust the print density automatically.
Panel PCB
The Panel PCB controls the LCD.
It scans the keys on the panel and on the LCD.
Voice PCB
The Voice PCB outputs the voice guidance.
The nickel metal hydride battery to back-up the SDRAM of the Main control PCB, is equipped on the
voice PCB.
2.6 Network Control Unit (NCU) PCB

The NCU PCB provides the connection to the telephone line. It consists of the interface circuit, ring
signal detector and telephone control circuit.
IC1
LINE
IC2
OFHK
CI
SDI
SDO
FSYNL
TEL1
MCLK
24.576MHZ
PC4
TEL2
OH
NCU PCB block diagram

Major components of the NCU
IC1: AFE (Analog Front End)
IC1 has the following functions:
Off Hook (The establishment of DC loop state): It makes the quiescent state from the loop state.
CI detector: It detects the ringing signal.
OH detector: It detects the state of On-hook or Off-hook of the external telephone.
IC2
IC2 controls the IC1. It also sets the parameter of the IC1.
H relay
It exchanges the connection for the Tel1 and Tel2 line connection.
Normally, it is connected to the line, makes AC loop and detects Off-hook by line current.
hen it is connected to the private line, the line current is not available but it is supplied private
W
current from the MFP.
CI detector
Detects the calling signal.
OH detector
Detects the hook condition of the second telephone unit. Normally, IC1 detects the hook condition.
When the second telephone is connected to the private line, PC4 detects the hook condition.
2.7 Low Voltage Power Supply Unit (LVPS)

The power supple is from 220 VAC to 240 VAC.
The power supply unit receives the input line voltage and currents it to output voltage of +5 VDC, +24
VDC and +3.3 VDC.
+24 VDC is controlled by transformer, + 5 VDC and + 3.3 VDC is controlled by DC/DC converter.
It consists of the primary controller, secondary controller, heater controller and flicker controller.
The AC input is switched between INLET and AC SW.
An overvoltage and overcurrent preventing circuit is equipped.
A driver circuit for the heat roller is quipped.
The output range is from 750 W / 220 VAC to 750 W / 240 VCA.
INLET
SW
INPUT AC CN1
OUTPUT CN2
FUSE
L
CN1
LINE FILTER
RECTIFICATION/
LEVEL
+24.0V
RECTIFICATION/
LEVEL
3
4
5
6
CONTROL
+24V
HEATER
CONTROL 1
CONTROL
DC/DC +
CONTROL IC
01
HEATER
CONTROL 2
PC1A
CONTROL
DC/DC +
+5.0V
11
12
+3.3V
OUTPUT HEATER CN101
7
8
9
10
SGND
15
16
PC2A
PT102
PT101
13
14
PGND
HC2
HC1
DB2 LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
2.8 High Voltage Power Supply

This PCB makes and supply high voltage for every electrophotographic process (charging, grid,
developing, transferring).
To charge the drum surface negatively, the charge section generates negative-voltage and impresses
the comb electrode.
To charge the drum surface evenly, the grid mesh at the opening of the charge section generates
negative-voltage and impresses the grid electrode. The voltage is changed by an analog signal.
To transfer the toner in the developing unit to the drum, the developing unit generates negative-charge
and impresses the mag-roller. The voltage is changed by an analog signal.
To transfer the image on the drum to the paper, the transfer unit generates positive-voltage and
impresses the transfer roller. By cleaning the transfer roller, negative-voltage is generated and
impressed to the roller. The voltage is changed by an analog signal.
+24V
Charge(-)
Control Signal
G rid(-)
PCB
HVPS
D eveloper(-)
Analog Signal
Transfer (+)
Transfer (-)
DB2 PCB High Voltage Power Supply
3 Adjustment Procedures
3.1 Field Service Program Modes
The fax machine feature maintenance modes for machine adjustment. Each mode is listed below
along with the command used to activate the mode and a brief functional description.
Note: When you press * , you will hear short beeps. However continue the operation, as there
is no
problem.
Set or Clear Machine Parameters...............................................................................SETTING, *, 0, 0
Used to set or clear machine parameters.
Set or Clear Memory Switches....................................................................................SETTING, *, 0, 1
Used to set or clear memory switches.
Clear Programmed Data / User Settings....................................................................SETTING, *, 0, 2
Erases user-programmed information (date, time, TTI, address
book
, etc.) and any documents stored in memory.
All RAM Clear................................................................................................................SETTING, *, 0, 3
Erases same information as Clear Programmed Data / User Settings function along with
resetting all of the machine memory switches and unique switches to factory defaults.
Set or Clear Unique Switches......................................................................................SETTING, *, 0, 4
Used to set or clear Unique switches.
T.30 Monitor..................................................................................................................SETTING, *, 0, 5
Used to print a G3 procedural summary of the fax communication.
Printer maintenance.....................................................................................................SETTING, *, 0, 6
A
ccess this mode to determine the cause of the
Call Service error message.
Or, w
hen replaced the Fuser unit or Image
t
ransfer roller
, reset the counter using this mode.
Monitor Speaker...........................................................................................................SETTING, *, 0, 8
Use to hear the signal sound with machines speaker during fax transaction.
Test Modes....................................................................................................................SETTING, *, 0, 9
Allows the technician to perform a series of diagnostic tests.
Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switches and
Unique Switches List...................................................................................................SETTING, *, 1, 0
Prints a list of the machine switch settings showing the default settings and current settings.
Factory Functions .......................................................................................................SETTING, *, 1, 1

Line Test
s. ....................................................................................................................SETTING, *, 1, 2

Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode....................................................................................SETTING, *, 1, 4
Perform it before installing the fax machine.
Set or clear the consumable order sheet...................................................................SETTING, *, 1, 5
Used to set or clear the consumable order sheet.
DRAM Clear...................................................................................................................SETTING, *, 1, 6
Used to clear a DRAM.
Clear Life Monitor.........................................................................................................SETTING, *, 1, 7
Used to clear a Life monitor keeps a count of the pages scanned, etc.
Clear option modules SRAM.......................................................................................SETTING *, 1. 8
Used to clear a SRAM of option module.
Set Service Code..........................................................................................................SETTING, *, 1, 9
Used to protect to clear a Life monitor.
Life Monitor Maintenance............................................................................................SETTING, *, 2, 0
When the main PCB has been replaced, you should register the previous several counter
values of the life monitor.
Sensor Input test .........................................................................................................SETTING, *, 2, 2
Sensor diagnostic test.
3-1
Printer diagnostic mode..............................................................................................SETTING, *, 2, 3

Printer diagnostic test.
Network service
m
ode ................................................................................................SETTING, *, 2, 4
Used to display the server
sumcheck, export/import the network setting data or to initialize

the network settings.
Flash ROM Sum check.................................................................................................SETTING, *, 2, 9
Used to confirm flash ROM Check Sum after the software is overwritten.
Service Report setting.................................................................................................SETTING, *, 4,
2
Used to enter location where to send the service report.
Printer registration
adjustment...................................................................................SETTING, *, 4,
3
Used to adjust
the printer registration.
Printer trouble reset.....................................................................................................SETTING, *, 4,
5
Used to delete
the error message on the LCD.

Cleaning mode..............................................................................................................SETTING, *, 4,
6
Used to rotate the feed roller and registration roller for cleaning.
Voice test.......................................................................................................................SETTING, *, 4,
7
Used to test
the voice guidance.

Set or Clear Network Switches....................................................................................SETTING, *, 5, 1
Used to set or clear Network switches.
Security function maintenance...................................................................................SETTING, *, 5, 2
Used to edit the security function regardless of the registered protect passcode.
Black ratio measuring..................................................................................................SETTING, *, 5, 4
Used to measure the black ratio of any document.
Service function menu.................................................................................................SETTING, *, 7, 7
Displays all the available field service program modes shortcuts.
Update the software.....................................................................................................SETTING, *, 9, 6
Used to upgrade the software using the CF (Compact Flash) card.
Quick installation mode...............................................................................................SETTING, *, 9, 9
You can set the initial setting mode, consumable order sheet setting and service report
setting continuously.
3-2
3.2 Machine Parameter Adjustment

3.2.1 Setting the Machine Parameters
These switches are used to program internal machine parameters. The primary back up battery
maintains these settings if power is lost.
1. From standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>.
2. Select Parameters Edit and press [Enter].
3. Call up the desired switch by pressing
or
, or by pressing the numeric keypad.
4. Press [Enter].
5. To navigate through the machine parameter settings:

The bits are ranged from 7 (left) to 0 (right).
Press
or
of the cursor key to move the cursor.
Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or
or
, to change the bit value.
Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed parameter and return to the machine parameter edit screen.
Press [Cancel] not to save the setting of the displayed parameter.
6. If you want to set other machine parameters, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
7. Press <Reset> to return the machine to standby.
Note: You can confirm the initial setting of each Machine parameter by the Machine Parameters List.
The Machine Parameters List will be printed by pressing <Menu>,
<*>, <1>, <0>.
3.2.2 Clearing the Machine Parameters

Resets the machine parameters to factory defaults.
2. Select Clear Parameters and press [Enter].
3. Press [Yes]. The machine parameters will reset to factory defaults.

Note: To finish the operation without clearing the parameters, press [No].
4. Press <Reset>
to
return the machine to standby.

3-3
Machine Parameter 000 --- Factory use only

Machine Parameter 001
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Output attenuation
See table below

Note: The setting of this switch is available only
when setting other than 0 dB (and this setting is
used instead of Memory Switch 011, bit 3-0.)
Machine Parameter 001Output attenuation

Switch
3
2
1
0
-15
dB
1
1
1
1
-14
dB
1
1
1
0
-13
dB
1
1
0
1
-12
dB
1
1
0
0
-11
dB
1
0
1
1
-10
dB
1
0
1
0
-9
dB
1
0
0
1
-8
dB
1
0
0
0
-7
dB
0
1
1
1
-6
dB
0
1
1
0
-5
dB
0
1
0
1
-4
dB
0
1
0
0
-3
dB
0
0
1
1
-2
dB
0
0
1
0
-1
dB
0
0
0
1
-0
dB
0
0
0
0
Machine Parameter 002 ~ 006 --- Factory use only

Switch
7
Initial
Setting
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
DRAM capacity indication

(Spare)
(Slot 2)
This switch indicates the DRAM capacity.

(This switch is read only, do not set any character)
You can see the memory capacity by how many 1
is indicated on the LCD. One 1 means 8MB.
For example, if three 1 are indicated,
i.e. 00000111, the DRAM capacity is
8MB x
3=
24MB.

(Slot 1)
o
n
the
Main PCB
Machine Parameter 008 and 009 --- Factory use only
3-4

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
ADF scanner registration

adjust (Horizontal)
Switch
Copy/Scan mode
Adjusts the start point to
scan the document.
The plus setting increases
the left margin and the minus
setting decreases it.
1 step = 5 / 600 dpi
(0.2116 mm)
76543210
+25 steps 00011001

:

00010000

:

00001000

:

00000000

:

10001000

:

10010000

:
-25 steps 10011001
Settings
+5.29 mm
+3.39 mm
+1.69mm
0 mm
-1.69 mm
-3.39 mm
-5.29 mm
Note: To adjust fax mode, adjust machine

parameter 453.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Adjustment of the scanning

stretching and squeezing for
ADF.
(Horizontal)
Switch 76543210
The plus setting stretches the

image data and the
minus setting squeezes it.
Each setting changes by
0.1%
3-5
Settings

00001111 +1.5 %

:

00001000 +0.8 %

:

00000100 +0.4 %

:

00000010 +0.2 %

000000
0
1 +0.1 %

00000000
0 % Initial setting

1
00000
0
1 -0.1 %

1
0000010 -0.2 %

:

10000100 -0.4 %

:

10001000 -0.8 %

:
10001111 -1.5 %

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments

ADF.
(Vertical)
Switch 76543210
Settings

00111111 +6.3 %

:

00011111 +3.1 %

:

00001111 +1.5 %

:

00001000 +0.8 %

:

000000
0
1 +0.1 %

00000000
0 % Standard

1
0000
00
1
-
0.
1
%

:

10001000 -0.8 %

:

10001111 -1.5 %

:

10011111 -3.1 %

:

10111111 -6.3 %
Fax/Scan mode
The plus setting squeezes
the image data and the
minus setting stretches it.
0.1%
For copy mode, adjust machine parameter 430.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Leading edge document

margin adjustment (ADF)
Adjusts the leading edge
margin from Document
Sensor 2 (DS2) to the start
of scanning the position.
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi
(0.0847 x 2 mm)
Switch
76543210
Settings
63 steps

-63step
00111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
10001000
:
10010000
:
10100000
:
101111111
+10.67 mm
+5.41 mm
+2.71 mm
+1.35 mm
27.8 mm
-1.35 mm
-2.71 mm
-5.41 mm
-10.67 mm
Note: To adjust copy mode, add the steps in

machine parameter 431.
Note: To adjust fax mode, add the steps in machine
parameter 086, 087, 088 or 089.
3-6

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Trailing edge document

Adjusts document feed after
the trailing edge of a document passes Document
Sensor 2 (DS2).
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi
(0.0847 x 2 mm)
Switch
76543210
Settings
63 steps

-63step
00111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
10001000
:
10010000
:
10100000
:
101111111
+10.67 mm
+5.41 mm
+2.71 mm
+1.35 mm
27.8 mm
-1.35 mm
-2.71 mm
-5.41 mm
-10.67 mm
Note: To adjust copy mode, add the steps in

Note: To adjust fax mode, add the steps in
machine parameter 076(Normal), 077(Fine),
078(Super-fine/Hyper-fine), 079(Ultra-fine).
3-7

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
FBS scanner registration

adjustment (Horizontal)
Switch
Copy/Scan mode
scan the document.
1 step = 5 / 600 dpi
(0.2116 mm)
76543210
25 steps 00011001

:

00010000

:

00001000

:

00000000

:

10001000

:

10010000

:
-25 steps 10011001
Settings
+5.29 mm
+3.39 mm
+1.69 mm
0 mm
-1.69 mm
-3.39 mm
-5.29 mm
Note: For adjust fax mode, adjust machine

parameter 454.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

FBS.
(Horizontal)
Switch 76543210
Settings

00001111 +1.5 %

:

00001000 +0.8 %

:

00000100 +0.4 %

:

00000010 +0.2 %

000000
0
1 +0.1 %

00000000
0 % Initial setting

1
00000
0
1 -0.1 %

1
0000010 -0.2 %

:

10000100 -0.4 %

:

10001000 -0.8 %

:

10001111 -1.5 %
The plus setting stretches

minus setting squeezes it.
0.1%
3-8

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

FBS.
(Vertical)
Switch 76543210
Settings

00111111 +6.3 %

:

00001000 +0.8 %

:

00000100 +0.4 %

:

00000010 +0.2 %

000000
0
1 +0.1 %

00000000
0 % Initial setting

1
00000
0
1 -0.1 %

1
0000010 -0.2 %

:

10000100 -0.4 %

:

10001000 -0.8 %

:

10111111 -6.3 %
Fax/Scan mode
0.1%
For copy mode, adjust machine parameter 435.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments

margin adjustment f
or FBS
Switch 76543210
Settings
3
1 steps 00011111 +4.36 mm

:
16
steps 00
0
10000 +2.25 mm

:
8
steps 00
00
1000 +1.13 mm

:
4
steps 00
00
0100 +0.56 mm

:

00000000
5 mm

:
-4
steps
1
000
0100

-
0.56mm

:
-8
steps
1
000
1
0
00

-
1.13mm

:
-16
steps
1
00
1
00
00

-2.25 mm

:
-3
1 steps
1
0100000
-4.36 mm
Copy/Scan mode
margin after Home Sensor
OFF to the start of scanning
the position.
Each setting changes
by 0.140793616
mm.
For copy mode, add the value of machine parameter

436.
For fax / mode, adjust machine parameter 455.
3-9

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Mirror carriage standby

position adjustment
Switch 76543210
63 steps

60 steps

50 steps

30 steps

10 steps

3 steps
2 steps
1 step

Adjusts the number of the

steps from the home sensor
of the mirror carriage OFF
to the standby position.
1 step = 0.140793616 mm
00111111
:
00111100
:
00110010
:
00010100
:
00001010
:
00000011
00000010
00000001
00000000
Settings
+8.87 mm
+8.45 mm
+7.04 mm
+2.82 mm
+1.41 mm
+0.42 mm
+0.28 mm
+0.14 mm
20 mm
When Switch 7 is 1, it means - . For example,

10000001 means -0.1
4
mm.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Mirror carriage transfer mode

position adjustment
Adjusts the number of the
steps from the home sensor
of the mirror carriage OFF
to the transfer mode position.
1 step = 0.140793616 mm
Switch 76543210
63 steps

60 steps

50 steps

30 steps

10 steps

3 steps
2 steps
1 step

00111111
:
00111100
:
00110010
:
00010100
:
00001010
:
00000011
00000010
00000001
00000000
Settings
+8.87 mm
+8.45 mm
+7.04 mm
+2.82 mm
+1.41 mm
+0.42 mm
+0.28 mm
+0.14 mm
20 mm

10000001 means -0.1
4
mm.
Note: After adjusting the Mirror carriage transfer
mode position, adjust Machine Parameter 013
and 014.
3-10

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Scanning density
level adjustment in normal
resolution.
Switch 76543210
01111111 Darkest setting
:
00001000
:
00000000 Initial setting
:
10001000
:
11111111 Lightest setting

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Scanning density level

adjustment in fine resolution.
Switch 76543210
:
00001000
:
:
10001000
:

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
adjustment in super-fine
resolution.
Usage/Comments
Switch 76543210
:
00001000
:
:
10001000
:
3-11

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

adjustment in hyper-fine
resolution.
Switch 76543210
:
00001000
:
:
10001000
:

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

adjustment in ultra-fine
(600dpi x
600dpi)
resolution.
Switch 76543210
:
00001000
:
:
10001000
:

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
adjustment in background
mode.
Usage/Comments
Switch 76543210
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
10001000
:
:
3-12

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Left side edge document
margin adjustment
Adjust this parameter when black line appears on

the left edge of the printouts in following cases:
While paper selection is set to Auto, A4 or B4
paper is selected in rotate printing
The document set on the FBS is A5 or B5 , or
the vertical length of the document is shorter than
A5 or B5 .

0.4233 mm.
Left side means the side of
the scanning position.
Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1

:
1 1 1 1 0 0

:
1 1 0 0 1 0

:
1 0 1 0 0 0

:
0 1 1 1 1 0

:
0 1 0 1 0 1

:
0 0 0 1 0 1

:
0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 0
Settings
26.67 mm
25.40 mm
21.17 mm
16.93 mm
12.70 mm
8.47 mm
2.11 mm (Initial setting)
0.42 mm
0.0 mm

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments

Fax mode
Normal Resolution
Sensor 2 (DS2).
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi
(0.0847 x 2 mm)
Switch
76543210
Settings
31 steps

-31step
00011111
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
10001000
:
10010000
:
10001111
+5.25 mm
+2.71 mm
+1.35 mm
27.8 mm
-1.35 mm
-2.71 mm
-5.25 mm
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter

014, when adjusting the steps for normal
transmission.
3-13

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments

Fax mode
Fine Resolution
Sensor 2 (DS2).
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi
(0.0847 x 2 mm)
Switch
76543210
Settings
31 steps

-31step
00011111
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
10001000
:
10010000
:
100011111
+5.25 mm
+2.71 mm
+1.35 mm
27.8 mm
-1.35 mm
-2.71 mm
-5.25 mm
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter 014,

when adjusting the steps for fine transmission.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

Fax mode
Super-fine/Hyper-fine Resolution
Sensor 2 (DS2).
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi
(0.0847 x 2 mm)
Switch
76543210
Settings
31 steps

-31step
00011111
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
10001000
:
10010000
:
10001111
+5.25 mm
+2.71 mm
+1.35 mm
27.8 mm
-1.35 mm
-2.71 mm
-5.25 mm

when adjusting the steps for super-fine or
hyper-fine transmission.
3-14

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

Fax mode
Ultra-fine Resolution
Sensor 2 (DS2).
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi
(0.0847 x 2 mm)
Switch
76543210
Settings
31 steps

-31step
00011111
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
10001000
:
10010000
:
10001111
+5.25 mm
+2.71 mm
+1.35 mm
27.8 mm
-1.35 mm
-2.71 mm
-5.25 mm
Note: Add these steps to machine parameter

014, when adjusting the steps for ultra-fine
transmission.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Adjust
Fax mode
Document type: Normal
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi
(0.0847 x 2 mm)
Usage/Comments
Switch
76543210
Settings
31 steps

-31 step
00011111
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
10001000
:
10010000
:
10011111
+5.25 mm
+2.71 mm
+1.35 mm
0 mm
-1.35 mm
-2.71 mm
-5.25 mm

when adjusting the steps for fax mode /
normal scanning.
3-15

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments

Fax mode
Document type: Fine
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi
(0.0847 x 2 mm)
Switch
76543210
Settings
31 steps

-31step
00011111
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
10001000
:
10010000
:
10011111
+5.25 mm
+2.71 mm
+1.35 mm
0 mm
-1.35 mm
-2.71 mm
-5.25 mm

when adjusting the steps for fax mode / fine
scanning.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments

Fax mode
Document type: Super Fine /
Hyper Fine
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi
(0.0847 x 2 mm)
Switch
76543210
Settings
31 steps

-31 step
00011111
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
10001000
:
10010000
:
10011111
+5.25 mm
+2.71 mm
+1.35 mm
0 mm
-1.35 mm
-2.71 mm
-5.25 mm

when adjusting the steps for fax mode /
super-fine or hyper-fine scanning.
3-16

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

Fax mode
Document type: Ultra Fine
(600 dpi)
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi
(0.0847 x 2 mm)
Switch
76543210
Settings
31 steps

-31 step
00011111
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
10001000
:
10010000
:
10011111
+5.25 mm
+2.71 mm
+1.35 mm
0 mm
-1.35 mm
-2.71 mm
-5.25 mm

when adjusting the steps for fax mode / ultrafine (600dpi) scanning.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
adjustment (Horizontal) at
the 1st cassette for normal
printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
Parameter 110 for the
rotate printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm
Note: Set this switch after setting the margin to 0

mm in Unique Switch 52. Then, after setting
this switch, set the margin to the initial setting
in Unique Switch 52.
3-17

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer registration adjustment (Horizontal) at

the 2nd cassette for normal
printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

the 3rd cassette for normal
printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-18

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

the 4th cassette for normal
printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
the Bypass tray for normal
printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-19

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
the duplex printing for normal
printing.
print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Switch
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
the 1st cassette for rotate
printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-20

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

the 2nd cassette for rotatel
printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

the 3rd cassette for rotate
printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-21

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

the 4th cassette for rotate
printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
the Bypass tray for rotate
printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-22

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
adjustment (Horizontal) at duplex printing for rotate printing.
print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
Switch
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
printing.
Switch
Adjusts the ending point to

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-23

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-24

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-25

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
the duplex printing for normal
printing.
print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Switch
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
the 1st cassette for rotate
printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-26

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

the 2nd cassette for rotatel
printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-27

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-28

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
duplex printing for rotate
printing.
Switch

print.
The setting
changes by
0.1mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
adjustment.
Switch
Adjusts the left margin at the

1st cassette for normal printing.
The setting
changes by
1 mm.
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-29

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
adjustment.
Switch

2nd cassette for normal printing.
TThe setting
changes by 1
mm.
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
adjustment.
Switch

3rd cassette for normal printing.
TThe setting
changes by 1
mm.
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-30

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
adjustment.
Switch

4th cassette for normal printing.
TThe setting
changes by 1
mm.
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
adjustment.
Switch

Bypass tray for normal printing.
The setting
changes by
16 dots (0.6773 mm).
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-31

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
adjustment.
Adjusts the left margin at duplex printing for normal printing.
The setting
changes by
16 dots (0.6773 mm).
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
Switch
76543210
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
adjustment.
Switch

1st cassette for rotatel printing.
The setting
changes by
1 mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-32

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
adjustment.
Switch

2nd cassette for rotate printing.
TThe setting
changes by 1
mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
adjustment.
Switch

3rd cassette for rotate printing.
TThe setting
changes by 1
mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-33

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
adjustment.
Switch

4th cassette for rotate printing.
TThe setting
changes by 1
mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
adjustment.
Switch

Bypass tray for rotate printing.
The setting
changes by
16 dots (0.6773 mm).
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-34

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
adjustment.
Switch
Adjusts the left margin at

the duplex printing for rotate
printing.
The setting
changes by
16 dots (0.6773 mm).
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

Machine Parameter 159 --- Factory use onlyMachine Parameter 160

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
adjustment.
Adjusts the right margin at
printing.
The plus setting decreases
the right margin and the
minus setting increases it.
The setting
changes by
1mm.
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
Usage/Comments
Switch
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-35

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
adjustment.
printing.
The setting
changes by
1mm.
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
Usage/Comments
Switch
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
adjustment.
printing.
The setting
changes by
1mm.
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
Usage/Comments
Switch
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-36

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
adjustment.
printing.
The setting
changes by
1mm.
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
Usage/Comments
Switch
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
adjustment.
printing.
The setting
changes by
1mm.
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
Usage/Comments
Switch
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-37

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
adjustment.
duplex printing for normal
printing.
The setting
changes by
1mm.
Note: See Machine
rotate printing.
Usage/Comments
Switch
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
adjustment.
the 1st cassette for rotatel
printing.
The setting
changes by
1mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
Usage/Comments
Switch
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-38

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
adjustment.
the 2nd cassette for rotate
printing.
The setting
changes by
1mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
Usage/Comments
Switch
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
adjustment.
printing.
The setting
changes by
1mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
Usage/Comments
Switch
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-39

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
adjustment.
printing.
The setting
changes by
1mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
Usage/Comments
Switch
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
adjustment.
printing.
The setting
changes by
1mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
Usage/Comments
Switch
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm

3-40

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
adjustment.
Switch
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-127 steps

duplex printing for rotate
printing.
The setting
changes by
1mm.
Note: See Machine
normal printing.
76543210
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
11110111
:
11101111
:
10000000
Settings
+12.7 mm
+3.2 mm
+1.6 mm
+0.8 mm
0 mm
-0.8 mm
-1.6 mm
-12.7 mm


Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

ADF.
(Vertical)
Copy mode
0.1%
Switch 76543210
Settings

00111111 +6.3 %

:

00011111 +3.1 %

:

00001111 +1.5 %

:

00001000 +0.8 %

:

000000
0
1 +0.1 %

00000000
0 % Standard

1
0000
00
1
-
0.
1
%

:

10001000 -0.8 %

:

10001111 -1.5 %

:

10011111 -3.1 %

:

10111111 -6.3 %
For fax and scan mode, adjust machine parameter
012.
3-41

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

Switch
76543210
31 steps 00011111

:
30 steps 00011110

:
20 steps 00010100

:
10 steps 00001010

:

00000000

:
-10 steps 10001010

:
-20 steps 10010100

:
-30 steps 10011110

:
-31 steps 10011111

1 step = 2 / 300 dpi
(0.0847 x 2 mm)
Settings
+5.25 mm
+5.08 mm
+3.38 mm
+1.69 mm
-1.69 mm
-3.38 mm
-5.08 mm
-5.25 mm
Note: These steps are added to the steps set in

Note: Adjust the steps in 600 dpi copy.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

Sensor 2 (DS2).
1 step = 2 / 300 dpi
(0.0847 x 2 mm)
Switch
76543210
31 steps 00011111

:
30 steps 00011110

:
20 steps 00010100

:
10 steps 00001010

:

00000000

:
-10 steps 10001010

:
-20 steps 10010100

:
-30 steps 10011110

:
-31 steps 10011111
Settings
+5.25 mm
+5.08 mm
+3.38 mm
+1.69 mm
-1.69 mm
-3.38 mm
-5.08 mm
-5.25 mm
Note: These steps are added to the steps set in

Note: Adjust the steps in 600 dpi copy.

3-42

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments

FBS.
(Vertical)
Copy mode
0.1%
Switch 76543210
Settings

00111111 +6.3 %

:

00001111 +1.5 %

:

00001000 +0.8 %

:

00000100 +0.4 %

:

00000010 +0.2 %

000000
0
1 +0.1 %

00000000
0 % Initial setting

1
00000
0
1 -0.1 %

1
0000010 -0.2 %

:

10000100 -0.4 %

:

10001000 -0.8 %

:

10001111 -1.5 %

:

00111111 -6.3 %
017.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
margin adjustment F
or FBS
Copy mode
the position.
by 0.140793616
mm.
Usage/Comments
Switch 76543210
Settings
3
1 steps 00011111 +4.36 mm

:
16
steps 00
0
10000 +2.25 mm

:
8
steps 00
00
1000 +1.13 mm

:
4
steps 00
00
0100 +0.56 mm

:

00000000
5 mm Initial setting

:
-4
steps
1
000
0100

-
0.56mm

:
-8
steps
1
000
1
0
00

-
1.13mm

:
-16
steps
1
00
1
00
00

-2.25 mm

:
-3
1 steps
1
0100000
-4.36 mm
Adjust the leading edge document margin for copy

mode add this value to machine parameter 018.
018.
3-43
Machine Parameter 437 and 438

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Lamp check times
Usage/Comments
This determines how many times to check the lamp
before correcting the shading data. When the it is
cold and lamp error is easy to occur, check the lamp
more times if it ready.
The checking time is a total of value of the machine
parameter 437 value integral multiple with 256 and
the value of machine parameter 438.
The initial setting is five times.
3-44

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
This sets the flexible volume at the separator roller.
If the flexible volume is high, the document skew
will improve but thin paper may easy to jam.
Switch
76543210
Settings
Document skew adjustment

1 step = 1 / 300 dpi
(0.08466 mm)
127 steps

32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

-8 steps

-16 steps

-120 steps
01111111
:
00100000
:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000000
:
1001000
:
11101111
:
11111000
+10.75 mm
+2.71 mm
+0.67 mm
+0.39 mm
0 mm
-0.39 mm
-0.67 mm
-10.16 mm

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Adjusts the start point to scan

the document.
Adjusts the start point to scan the document using

the ADF in fax mode.
The plus setting makes to start the point backward
than the standard point and the minus setting
makes the point forward .
Fax mode
1 step = 5 / 600 dpi
(0.2116 mm)
Switch
25 steps

20 steps

10 steps

5 steps

-5 steps

-10 steps

-20 steps

-25 steps
76543210
00011001
:
00010100
:
00001010
:
00000101
:
00000000
:
10000101
:
10001010
:
10010100
:
10011001
Settings
+5.29 mm
+4.23 mm
+2.12 mm
+1.05 mm
0 mm
-1.05 mm
-2.12 mm
-4.23 mm
-5.29 mm
Note: For copy/scan mode, adjust machine

parameter 010.
3-45

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
Adjust
scan the document.
Fax mode
1 step = 5 / 600 dpi
(0.2116 mm)
Usage/Comments
Adjusts the start point to scan the document using
the FBS in fax mode.
The plus setting makes to start the point backward
than the standard point and the minus setting
makes the point forward .
Switch
25 steps

20 steps

10 steps

5 steps

-5 steps

-10 steps

-20 steps

-25 steps
76543210
00011001
:
00010100
:
00001010
:
00000101
:
00000000
:
10000101
:
10001010
:
10010100
:
10011001
Settings
+5.29 mm
+4.23 mm
+2.12 mm
+1.05 mm
0 mm
-1.05 mm
-2.12 mm
-4.23 mm
-5.29 mm
Note: For copy/scan mode, adjust machine

parameter 015.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Adjust
margin adjustment f
or FBS
Fax mode
the position.
by 0.140793616
mm.
Usage/Comments
Switch 76543210
Settings
3
1 steps 00011111 +4.36 mm

:
16
steps 00
0
10000 +2.25 mm

:
8
steps 00
00
1000 +1.13 mm

:
4
steps 00
00
0100 +0.56 mm

:

00000000
5 mm

:
-4
steps
1
000
0100

-
0.56mm

:
-8
steps
1
000
1
0
00

-
1.13mm

:
-16
steps
1
00
1
00
00

-2.25 mm

:
-3
1 steps
1
0100000
-4.36 mm
For copy/scan mode, adjust machine parameter

018.

3-46

Machine Parameter 463 ~ 492
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
White balance adjustment
Switch
76543210
See next page which mode

to adjust
32 steps

16 steps

8 steps

4 steps

0 step

-4 step

-8 step

-16step

-32step
00100000 + Darkest setting

:
00010000
:
00001000
:
00000100
:
00000000 Standard
:
10000100
:
10001000
:
10010000
:
10100000 -Lightest setting
3-47
White balance adjustment

Mode
Copy
Document type
Text
Resolution Binalize method

600 dpi
Error diffusion
Photo/Text
Photo
Bachground
Scan
Text
600 dpi
Error diffusion
Photo/Text
Photo
Bachground
Text
300 dpi
Photo/Text
Photo
Bachground
Text
200 dpi
Photo/Text
Photo
Bachground
Fax
Normal, Fine, Super-,

Hyper-, Ultra-fime
Background
Grayscale
Simlpe binalize
200 dpi
Error diffusion
400 dpi
600 dpi
200 dpi
Dither
See former page how to adjust the parameter.
3-48
Contrast
Normal
Other than normal
Normal
Other than normal
Normal
Other than normal
Normal
Other than normal
Normal
Other than normal
Normal
Other than normal
Normal
Other than normal
Normal
Other than normal
Normal
Other than normal
Normal
Other than normal
Normal
Other than normal
Normal
Other than normal
Normal
Other than normal
Normal
Other than normal
Normal
Other than normal
Normal
Other than normal
All contrasts
All contrasts
Normal
Other than normal
Normal
Other than normal
Normal
Other than normal
Normal
Other than normal
Machine
parameter
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Adjust
PCL Personality
Usage/Comments
Switch
76543210
00000001
00000010
PCL (Initial setting)

PCL XL

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
PCL Orientationy
Usage/Comments
Switch
76543210
00000000
00000001
Portrait (Initial setting)

Landscape

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
Adjust
PCL Orientationy
Usage/Comments
Switch
76543210
00000000
00000001
00000010
00000011
00000100
00000101
00000110
00000111
00001000
00001001
00001010
00001101
00001110
00010000
00010001
00010100
3-49
Letter
Ledger
Legal
Executive
A3
A4 (Initial setting)
A5
A6
F4
B4 (JIS)
B5 (JIS)
Half Letter
COM10
DL
Postcard
Custom

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
PCL Paper source
Usage/Comments
Switch
76543210
00000000
00000010
00000011
00000100
00000101
00000110
Auto (Initial setting)

Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
Bypass tray

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
PCL Default Media Type
Usage/Comments
Switch
76543210
00000000
00000001
00000010
00000011
3-50
Plain (Initial setting)

Thick
Transparency
Envelope/Postcard
Machine Parameter 508 ~ 509 Default Font Number

Machin parameter 508
Usage/Comments
Switch 76543210
Switch 76543210
00010000
00000011
Courier (Initial setting)
00010000
00000101
CG Times
00010000
00000110
Letter Gothic
00010000
00010001
CG Omega
00010000
00010100
Coronet
00010000
00010111
Nw Cent Schlbk
00010000
00011111
IT CA vant Gard
00010000
00101100
Clarendon
00010000
00110100
Univers
00010000
01001000
Antiq Olive
00010000
01100101
Garamond
00010000
11001001
Marigold
00010001
00001010
Albertus
01000000
11011010
Arial
01000001
00101110
Symbol
01000010
00000101
Times New Rmn
01100000
00000011
Courier PS
01100000
00000100
Helvetica
01100000
00001111
Palation
01100000
00101111
ITC Bookman
01100010
00000101
Times
01110000
01010000
Mincho
01110000
01100010
Gothic
11110000
01010000
P. Mincho
11110000
01001101
P. Gothic
01111010
10101010
Winding
10110000
00101011
Zapf Chancery
10110000
00101101
Zapf Dingbats
00001011
00101110
Symbol PC
NOTE: The invalid combination of font number and symbols are on page 3-53.
3-51
Machine Parameter 510 ~ 511 Default Symbol

Usage/Comments
Switch 76543210
Switch 76543210
00000000
00000100
ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian
00000000
00001001
ISO 15: Italian
00000000
00001110
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1
00000000
00010011
ISO 11: Swedish
00000000
00010101
ISO 6: ASC ll
00000000
00100101
ISO 4: United Kingdom
00000000
00100110
ISO 69: French
00000000
00100111
ISO 21: German
00000000
00110101
Legal
00000000
01001110
ISO 8859/2 Latin 2
00000000
01011110
ISO 17: Spanish
00000000
10101101
PS Math
00000000
10101110
ISO 8859/5 Latin 5
00000000
10110100
Windows 3.1 Latin 5
00000000
11001010
Microsoft Publishing
00000000
11001110
ISO 8859/6 Latin6
00000000
11101010
Desk Top
00000001
00001101
Math-8
00000001
00010101
Roman-8
00000001
00100101
Windows 3.1 Latin 2
00000001
00101010
PC-1004
00000001
00110100
PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T
00000001
00110101
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
00000001
01001010
Ps Text
00000001
01010101
PC-8 Cord Page 437 (Initial setting)
00000001
01110101
PC-8 D/N, Cord Page 437N
00000001
10001010
Macintosh
00000001
10010101
PC-850 Multilingual
00000001
11001100
HP 4000 ITC Zapf Dingbats
00000001
11110101
PI Font
00000010
00110101
PC-852 Latin 2
00000010
01001110
ISO 8859/1 Latin1
00000010
01101011
Windows 3.1j Latin
00000010
01101100
Windows 3.1 Baltic
00000010
01101101
Symbol
00000010
01110101
Windows 3.1 Latin 1
NOTE: The invalid combination of font number and symbols are on page 3-53.
3-52
Invalid combination of font number and symbols

Courier
Marigold
Mincho
CG Times
Albertus
GothicP.
LetterGothic
Arial
MinchoP.
CG Omega
Symbol
Gothic
Coronet
TimesNewRmn
NwCentSchlbk
CourierPS
ITCAvantGard
Helvetica
Clarendon
Palatino
Univers
ITCBookman
AntiqOlive
Times
Windings
ZapfChancery
Zapf
SymbolPS
Dingbats
Garamond
ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
ISO 15: Italian
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
ISO 11: Swedish
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
ISO 6: ASCII
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
ISO 4: United Kingdom
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
ISO 69: French
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
ISO 21: German
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Legal
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
ISO 8859/2 Latin 2
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
ISO 17: Spanish
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
PSMath
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
ISO 8859/5 Latin 5
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Windows 3.1 Latin 5
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Microsoft Publishing
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
ISO 8859/6 Latin 6
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
DeskTop
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Math-8
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Roman-8
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Windows 3.1 Latin 2
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
PC-1004
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
PC-8 TK, Code Page 437T
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Windows 3.0 Latin 1
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
PS Text
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
PC-8 Code Page 437
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
PC-8 D/N, Code Page 437N
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Macintosh
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
PC-850 Multilingual
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
HP4000 ITC ZapfDingbats
Invalid
Invalid
PI Font
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
PC-852 Latin 2
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
ISO 8859/1 Latin 1
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Windows 3.1j Latin
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Windows 3.1 Baltic

Symbol
Invalid
Windows 3.1 Latin 1

PC-775
Windings
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
3-53
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Invalid
Machine Parameter 516 ~ 517 PCL X Resolutuion

Usage/Comments
Switch 76543210
Switch 76543210
00000001
00101100
300 dpi
00000010
01011000
600 dpi (Initial setting)
Machine Parameter 518 ~ 519 PCL X Resolutuion

Usage/Comments
Switch 76543210
Switch 76543210
00000001
00101100
300 dpi
00000010
01011000
600 dpi (Initial setting)
Machine Parameter 520 ~ 521 PCL Time-out period

Usage/Comments
Switch 76543210
Switch 76543210
00000000
00000000
Invalid
00000000
00000001
1 sec
00000000
00000010
2 sec
00000000
01100100
100 sec
00000000
11001000
200 sec
00000001
00101100
00000001
11110100
500 sec
300 sec (Initial setting)
00000011
00100000
800 sec
11111111
111111111
65535 sec
Machine Parameter 522 ~ 523 PCL Print copies

Usage/Comments
Switch 76543210
Switch 76543210
00000000
00000000
Invalid
00000000
00000001
1 copy (Initial setting)
00000000
00000010
2 copies
00000011
11100111
:
999 copies
3-54
Machine Parameter 524 ~ 525 PCL Time-out period

Machin parameter 524 Machin parameter 525
Usage/Comments
Switch 76543210
Switch 76543210
00000000
00000000
Invalid
00000000
00000001
1 sec
00000000
00000010
2 sec
00000000
00001010
00000000
01100100
100 sec
00000000
11001000
200 sec
00000001
00101100
300 sec
00000001
11110100
500 sec
11111111
11111111
:
10 sec (Initial setting)
:
65535 sec
3-55
Machine Parameter 532 ~ 533 Characters per inch

Usage/Comments
Switch 76543210
Switch 76543210
00000000
00000000
Invalid
00000000
00000011
Invalid
00000000
00000100
0.4 characters/inch
00000000
00000101
0.5 characters/inch
00000000
01011010
00000000
01100100
00000000
01101110
00000011
11100111
:
9.0 characters/inch
:
10.0 characters/inch (Initial setting)
:
11.0 characters/inch
:
99.9 characters/inch
Machine Parameter 536 ~ 537 PCL Size of Characters

Switch 76543210
Switch 76543210
00000000
00000000
Invalid0
00000000
00000001
1 point:
00000000
01100100
00000000
01111000
0100111
Usage/Comments
10.0 point
:
12.0 point (Initial setting)
:
00001101
999.7 point
3-56

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
PCL Line per page
(1 line/page)
Usage/Comments
Switch
76543210
00000000
00000001
:
00000100
00000101
:
10000000
60 lines (Letter)(Initial setting)

Invalid
Invalid
5 lines
128 lines

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
PCL Main Paper Source
Usage/Comments
Switch
76543210
00000000
00000010
00000011
00000110
3-57
Cassette 1 (Initial setting)

Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Bypass Tray

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Loop adjustment
Usage/Comments
This switch adjust the paper loop at the timing
roller.
The more loop it is made, the more square the
printout becomes. At the same time, thin paper is
easy to jam
Switch

6543210
0000000
0001000
0010001
0101010
0110010
80 ms
170 ms
340 ms
420 ms
500 ms

10001000 means -170 ms.
3-58
Machine Parameter 860 ~ 879

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Transfer current adjustment

1 step = 0.5 A
See table below for adjusting
paper size and type.
When the all black printed images are light,

increase the current.
When the half-tone printed images are light or
when the images drop out in white spots, decrease
the current.
Switch 3210

1111

1110
:

1100

1010
:

0110
:

0100
:

0010

0001

0000
7.5 A
7.0 A
6.0 A
5.0 A
3.0 A
2.0 A
1.0 A
0.5 A
0.0 A

10000100 means -2.0 A.
Adjustment targets
Size
Type
148 mm or smaller
149 ~ 182 mm
183 ~ 216 mm
217 ~ 257 mm
258 ~ 297 mm
Plain paper (front) Plain paper (back)

Machin parameter
860
861
862
863
864
Thick paper
Machin parameter Machin parameter

865
870
866
871
867
872
868
873
869
874
3-59
Emvelops
Machin parameter
875
876
877
878
879

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Copy print density
Switch 3210
:
0111
:
:
0011
:
0000 Invalid

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Fax received documents print
density
Switch 3210
:
0111
:
:
0011
:
0000 Invalid

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
PC printout print density
Usage/Comments
Switch 3210
:
0111
:
:
0011
:
0000 Invalid
3-60

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
List printout print density
Usage/Comments
Switch 3210
:
0111
:
:
0011
:
0000 Invalid

7
6
Initial
Setting
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Fusing temperature
Transparency Sheet
Switch

76
11
10
01
00
Fusing temperature
Envelop
Switch

543 /210
011 215 C
010 210 C
001 205 C
000 200 C Initial setting
101 195 C
110 190 C
111 185 C
Fusing temperature
Postcard
185 C
180 C
175 C
170 C

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Fusing temperature
Plain paper
Usage/Comments
Switch

3-61
210
011
010
001
000
101
110
111
195 C
190 C
185 C
180 C Initial setting
175 C
170 C
165 C
3.3 Memory Switch Adjustment

3.3.1 Setting the Memory Switches
maintains these settings if power are lost.
2. Select Mem Switch Edit and press [Enter].
or
4. Press [Enter].
5. To navigate through the memory switch settings:

Press
or
of the cursor key to move the cursor.
Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or
or
, to change the bit value.
Press [Enter] save the setting of the displayed memory switch and return to the memory
switch edit screen.
Press [Cancel] not to save the setting of the displayed memory switch.
6. If you want to set other memory switches, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
Note: You can confirm the initial setting of each Memory Switch by the Memory Switches List.
The memory switch List will be printed by pressing <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <0> and [Yes].
3.3.2 Clearing the Memory Switches

Resets the memory switches to factory defaults.
2. Select Mem Switch Clear and press [Enter].
3. Press [Yes]. The memory switches will reset to factory defaults.

Note: To finish the operation without clearing the switches, press [No]
.
3-62
Memory Switch 000 - Dialer

Initial
Switch
Adjust
Setting
7
0
Factory use only
6
0
Factory use only
5
0
CED detection condition
4
0
Usage/Comments
Sets whether the detection should be strict or not.
Switch
3
DIS detect time after dialing

0: 55 sec
1: 70 sec
CED detection
0: No
1: Yes
Dial tone detection
0: Do not dial
1: Dial
Phone line type for the first
phone line
0: PSTN
1: PBX
5
4
Normal
Strict
350ms 500ms 700ms 1000ms
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Sets the time DIS signal is detected after dialing a

number.
Can be use to ignore CED detection if noise on
the telephone line is mistaken as a 2100 Hz CED
signal.
Determines if the machine proceeds with dialing or
indicates an error if no dial tone is detected within
five seconds of going off-hook.
When set to PSTN, the machine checks for dial
tone and acts according to the setting of memory
switch 0
0
0, bit 1. When set to PBX, the machine
always dials a given number of seconds after going
off-hook. Memory switch 001 sets the number of
seconds.
3-63
Memory Switch 001 --- Dialer

Switch
7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
DIS detection condition
Sets whether the detection should be strict or not.
Switch
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
0
PBX mode dial pause
5
4
Normal
Strict
200ms 300ms 400ms 500ms
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Sets the number of seconds the machine waits

before dialing when memory switch 00
0
, bit 0 is set
to PBX mode.
Switch 3 2 1 0
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
Pause time
0 sec
1 sec
2 sec
3 sec
4 sec Initial setting
5 sec
6 sec
7 sec
8 sec
9 sec
10 sec
11 sec
12 sec
13 sec
14 sec
15 sec

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Redial in D.0.7 error

0: Yes
1: No
When set to 1, the machine does not redial in D.0.7

error (Incoming detection time over).
Memory Switch 003 --- Factory use only
3-64

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
DTMF attenuation
See table below

Note: The setting of this switch is available only
when setting other than 0.
Memory Switch 004DTMF attenuation

Switch
3
2
1
0
-15
dB
1
1
1
1
-14
dB
1
1
1
0
-13
dB
1
1
0
1
-12
dB
1
1
0
0
-11
dB
1
0
1
1
-10
dB
1
0
1
0
-9
dB
1
0
0
1
-8
dB
1
0
0
0
-7
dB
0
1
1
1
-6
dB
0
1
1
0
-5
dB
0
1
0
1
-4
dB
0
1
0
0
-3
dB
0
0
1
1
-2
dB
0
0
1
0
-1
dB
0
0
0
1
-0
dB
0
0
0
0

7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
1
1
0
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
Ring signal detect time
Number of CI signal
detection
in Fax/Tel Ready mode
0:
Detect 1
time
1:
Detect 2
times
Usage/Comments
Set the time that an incoming ring will not be detected
after hanging up. (Fax/Tel Ready mode only.)
Switch 6 5 4
0 0 0 100 ms
0 0 1 200 ms
0 1 0 300 ms
0 1 1 400 ms
1 0 0 500 ms
1 0 1 600 ms
1 1 0 700 ms
1 1 1 800 ms
Se
lect
the number of detection
time of CI
signal in
the Fax/Tel Ready mode or in
the ringer
s
ilent mode.
Incoming calls are answered according to this setting
regardless of the number of rings chosen in the User
Settings.
Dual ring detection

0: No
1: Yes
Long ring detection
0: No
1: Yes
When enabled, the machine is able to auto answer

an incoming ring with an off time of 120 - 60 ms.
F
requency of
the CI signal
detection
0: No
1: Yes
When disabled, the unit will not check the frequency of
the incoming CI signal.
Allows the machine to respond to an incoming ring

if the ring on time is longer than two seconds.
Memory Switch 006 ~ 009 --- Factory use only
3-65
Memory Switch 010 --- Transmission

7
Initial
Setting
1
3
2
1
0
1
1
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Busy tone detection

Set this switch to 0 if the ring tone of remote unit is
0: No
mistaken for a busy signal.
1: Yes
Fallback pattern (bps)
2400
4800
7200
9600
12000 14400
Set at 0: 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times
Set at 1: 4 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times
Overseas mode
Re-enables echo suppression that is disabled by
0: No
the CED signal (2100 Hz). Also ignores the first DIS
1: Yes
signal and transmits the DCS signal in response to
the second DIS signal.
V.29 Echo Protect tone
International telephone lines equipped with echo
0: No
suppression will cut the beginning portion of the
1: Yes
transmitted information which may cause the
receiver not to receive the training and data. To
protect the received image from degrading, a 0.5
second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to the
training using G3 high-speed modem training
(V.29).
Maximum transmit speed (kbps)
2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6
0 0 0 0 0 0
0
0
1
1 1
1
1
1
0 0 0 0 1 1
1
1
0
0 0
0
1
1
0 0 1 1 0 0
1
1
0
0 1
1
0
0
0 1 0 1 0 1
0
1
0
1 0
1
0
1
3-66

Switch
7
Initial
Setting
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data

When CFR and data overlap due to line echo, increase the interval between CFR
and data transmission using this switch.
250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms

Switch 7 0
0
1
1
Switch 6 0
1
0
1
Interval between DCS and TCF
When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo, increase the
interval between DCS and TCF signals using this switch.
0
Switch 5
Switch 4
3
2
1
0
1
0
0
1
75 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms

0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Output attenuation
See table below
Memory Switch 011Output attenuation

Switch
3
2
1
0
-15
dB
1
1
1
1
-14
dB
1
1
1
0
-13
dB
1
1
0
1
-12
dB
1
1
0
0
-11
dB
1
0
1
1
-10
dB
1
0
1
0
-9
dB
1
0
0
1
3-67
-8
dB
1
0
0
0
-7
dB
0
1
1
1
-6
dB
0
1
1
0
-5
dB
0
1
0
1
-4
dB
0
1
0
0
-3
dB
0
0
1
1
-2
dB
0
0
1
0
-1
dB
0
0
0
1
-0
dB
0
0
0
0

7
6
5
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Changing the date format of
the transmitted TTI
0: No
1: Yes
TTI transmit
0: No
1: Yes
When set to 1, the machine changes the date

format of the transmitted TTI from MM:DD:YY, or
vice versa.
When set at 0, transmission of the TTI is disabled.
The TTI includes the followings:
Sender name
Sender
s fax number
Data & time, and number of pages
To set the individually
transmission of them, see

Memory SW 016.
The time limit to receive the response signal for the
ECM post message.
(Note: Turning TTI

transmission off may violate
local or federal regulations.)
ECM response time
0: 3 sec
1: 4.8 sec
ECM error retransmit time
The time limit before the ECM error is retransmitted.
0: 200 ms
1: 400 ms
Interval between DIS and DCS
Switch 1
Switch 0
0 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms

0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1

7
Initial
Setting
0
2
1
0
1
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
ANSam detection
0: Yes
1: No
V.34 transmission
0: Yes
1: No
CSI/TSI/CIG transmit
0: Yes
1: No
ECM mode
0: On
1: Off
Retransmit automatically
when receiving RTN/PIN
signals
0: Yes
1: No
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
During the V8 handshake, if some noise disturbs

the handshake and an error occurs, set to 1.
Individual setting for V.34 transmission.
When set at 1, transmission of the CSI, TSI and
CIG signals are disabled.
Determines ECM mode. ECM mode reduces
document memory and may lengthen transmission
and reception times.
When set to 1, retransmission disables
automatically if receiving RTN/PIN signals.
3-68

7
Initial
Setting
0
6
5
4
3
2
0
0
0
0
0
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Sending RTC signal when
transmission is canceled
0: Yes
1: No
Cancel redial if T.4.1 or T.4.4

error occurs
0: Yes
1: No
Action after EOR signal
0: Continue
1: Discontinue
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Program individual autodialer

attributes
0: No
1: Yes
Allows individual setting of memory switches 010 as

attribute 1, 011 as attribute 2, 012 as attribute 3 and
013 as attribute 4 when fax or e-mail destinatilns
are registered in the address book. (Refer to page
3-84 for settings.)
RTC signal is sent at the end of the transmission.

When set at 0, the machine will send the RTC if
the transmission is canceled. No error will occur.
When set at 1, an error will occur because
RTC will not be sent at the end of a canceled
transmission.
When set at 0, if a T.4.1 or T.4.4 error occurs, the
machine will not retry the transmission.
Sets action after receiving PPR four times at 2400
bps.

7
6
5
4
3
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
1
Subscriber ID transmit
0: No
1: Yes
TTI (name) transmit

0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Additional data on TTI
transmit
0: No
1: Yes
Usage/Comments
When set at 0, the transmission of the additional

data (time, the number of pages, file number, etc)
is disabled.
Note: This switch is available only when Memory
switch 012, bit 4 and/or Memory switch 013, bit 5 is
available.
When set at 0, the transmission of the subscriber
ID is disabled.
available.
When set at 0, the transmission of the name that
is stored in the unit is disabled.
available.
3-69

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Check only manually entered
fax numbers in ID check
transmission
0: No
1: Yes
When set at 1, the ID check transmission will

check only the manually entered fax numbers and
not check the numbers entered using the address
book.

Memory Switch 020 --- Reception
7
Initial
Setting
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Data error rate
0: 10%
1: 20%
Pause one second after
sending CED
0: No (75 ms)
1: Yes (1 sec)
Usage/Comments
Determines the allowable number of erred lines out
of total lines received in a document.
A 2100 Hz CED signal disables echo suppression
in some telephone equipment. When set to 1, the
machine pauses one second after sending CED,
which allows echo suppression to restart. This may
help with problematic overseas reception.
Factory use only

Factory use only
Receive speed (kbps)
Maximum receive speed may be slowed to compensate for poor phone lines.
2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6
0 0 0 0 0 0
0
0
1
1 1
1
1
1
0 0 0 0 1 1
1
1
0
0 0
0
1
1
0 0 1 1 0 0
1
1
0
0 1
1
0
0
0 1 0 1 0 1
0
1
0
1 0
1
0
1
3-70

7
6
Initial
Setting
0
0
5
4
0
0
1
0
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Not used
DIS inch declaration
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
T1 timer
0: 35 sec
1: 20 sec
Print image data when post
message is not received after
receiving RTC signal
0: No
1: Yes
DIS/DTC Extend field
Transmit
0: Yes
1: NoTx until Bit No.24 of
DIS/DTC
G3 echo receive
Adjusts the T1 time-out. After the machine dials

the remote machines phone number, it begins
sending CNG and waits this amount of time before
disconnecting the line.
If the received document includes the RTC, the
machine prints the data even though the following
protocol is not succeeded.
Setting this switch to 1 will disable ITU-T
superfine
mode.
Adjusts the delay between detection of training/TCF and sending of CFR.

Switch 1
Switch 0
100 ms 500 ms 800 ms 1200 ms

0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1

7
6
Initial
Setting
0
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
V.34 reception
0: Yes
1: No
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Calling period in Fax/Tel
reception mode
Usage/Comments
Individual setting for V.34 reception.
Defines the callign period in Fax/Tel reception mode

Switch 2 1 0
000
30 seconds Inital setting
001
40 seconds
010
50 seconds
011
60 seconds
100
90 seconds
101
120 seconds
110
180 seconds
111
300 seconds
3-71
Memory Switch 030 --- Modem

Switch
7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
0
Adjust
Number of HDLC end flags
Usage/Comments
Defines the number of HDLC end flags.
Switch 7 6 5 4
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
3
2
1
0
0
0
Factory use only

Factory use only
Digital cable equalizer
0: Free
1: Hold
No use
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Initial setting
When set to 1, become efficient for the line short

break, but become weak for the line noise. It
s available only for communication at 14,400 or
12,000 bit/s.

7
6
Initial
Setting
0
1
EYE-Q check level at

7200 bps
5
4
0
1

9600 bps
3
2
0
1

12000 bps
1
0
0
0

14400 bps
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
0
0
1
1
Strict-- - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0
1
0
1
3-72

7
Initial
Setting
1
5
4
3
2
0
0
1
0
Factory use only

Factory use only
2400 bps
1
0
1
0

4800 bps
Switch
Adjust
EYE-Q slice level
0: Disable
1: Enable
Check EYE-Q
0: No
1: Yes
Usage/Comments
Setting this bit to 1 enables memory switch 032,
bits 0-3 and memory switch 031, bits 0-7 and
enables EYE-Q check adjustment.
Set at 0: Line condition status (EYE-Q) is not
checked after checking TCF.
Set at 1: Line condition status (EYE-Q) is checked
after checking TCF.
0
0
1
1
Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
Strict - - - - - - - - - - - -Lenient
0
1
0
1

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Delete receive echo of CFR
at the receiver side
0: No
1: Yes
Expand FSK receive time
after detecting flag
0: 3.3 seconds
1: 10 seconds
Usage/Comments
Modem will be opened only in high-speed mode.

Sets this switch to 1 to resolve the problem caused
of the echo of CFR.
Setting this switch to 1 extend HDLC frame receive
timer in FSK from 3.3 seconds to 10 seconds after
detecting pre-amble.

Memory Switch 040 --- Scanner
7
6
5
4
3
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
0
1
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Document TX length limit
0: 3.6 meters
1: 1 meter
Usage/Comments
Setting to unlimited will override document jam

sensing.

3-73
Memory Switch 052 --- Printer

7
6
5
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
4
3
0
0
2
1
0
1
0
1
Switch
Bit 43210
00000
00001
00010
00011
00100
00101
00110
00111
01000
01001
01010
01011
01100
01101
01110
01111
10000
10001
10010
10011
10100
10101
10110
10111
11000
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Attach senders information
sign on the journal
0: No
1: Yes
Name priority on the journal
First priority
Name on address book
Subscriber ID
Dialed fax number
Dialed fax number
Dialed fax number
Dialed fax number
Dialed fax number
Dialed fax number
TTI
TTI
TTI
TTI
TTI
TTI
Subscriber ID
Subscriber ID
Subscriber ID
Subscriber ID
Subscriber ID
Subscriber ID
If this setting is activated, a sign that indicates that

the senders name printed on the journal is a received information.
This sets the priority of the name printed on the
journal.
See table below.
Second priority
Dialed fax number
TTI
Dialed fax number
TTI
TTI
Subscriber ID
Subscriber ID
TTI
TTI
Subscriber ID
Subscriber ID
Dialed fax number
Dialed fax number
Subscriber ID
Subscriber ID
Dialed fax number
Dialed fax number
TTI
TTI
Third priority
TTI
Dialed fax number
Subscriber ID
Dialed fax number
Subscriber ID
Dialed fax number
TTI
TTI
Subscriber ID
Subscriber ID
TTI
Dialed fax number
Subscriber ID
Subscriber ID
Dialed fax number
Dialed fax number
TTI
TTI
Dialed fax number
3-74
Forth priority
Subscriber ID
TTI
Subscriber ID
Dialed fax number
TTI
Dialed fax number
Subscriber ID
TTI
Subscriber ID
TTI
Subscriber ID
Dialed fax number
Subscriber ID
Dialed fax number
TTI
Dialed fax number
TTI
Dialed fax number
Memory Switch 060 --- Remote reception

7
6
Initial
Setting
0
1
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

CML relay off time after
dialing
0: 1 sec
1: 200 ms
DTMF tones heard through
handset
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
When dialing from the keypad, phone line noise

may occur as the CML relay switches on and off.
Set this switch to 0 to avoid this.
Determines if DTMF tones are produced through
the handset in off-hook dialing.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Off-hook / on-hook detect
time
Usage/Comments
Sets the time interval between the on-hook and offhook (or off-hook/on-hook) condition.
Switch 3 2 1 0 Time
0000
0 ms
0001
100 ms
0010
200 ms
0011
300 ms
0100
400 ms Initial setting
0101
500 ms
0110
600 ms
0111
700 ms
1000
800 ms
1001
900 ms
1 0 1 0 1000 ms
1 0 1 1 1100 ms
1 1 0 0 1200 ms
1 1 0 1 1300 ms
1 1 1 0 1400 ms
1 1 1 1 1500 ms
3-75

7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
1
3
2
1
0
0
0
1
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
CNG detect in Ans/Fax ready
0: No
1: Yes
Switch-hook time
When set to 1, the machine detects the CNG

signal in Ans/Fax ready.
If the switch hook is quickly depressed and
released, switch-to-fax will occur. This setting
adjusts how quickly the switch hook activation must
be.
Switch 3 2 1 0
Time
0000
0 ms
0001
100 ms
0010
200 ms
0011
0100
400 ms
0101
500 ms
0110
600 ms
0111
700 ms
1000
800 ms
1001
900 ms
1 0 1 0 1000 ms
1 0 1 1 1100 ms
1 1 0 0 1200 ms
1 1 0 1 1300 ms
1 1 1 0 1400 ms
1 1 1 1 1500 ms
3-76
Memory Switch 064 --- Remote reception and TAD interface

7
Initial
Setting
0
Switch
Incoming rings
Adjust
Usage/Comments
CNG detect period after TAD

begins recording ICM
Sets the period during which CNG is detected after

the TAD begins recording incoming message.
Switch 7 6 5 4
Time
0000
0 sec
0001
10 sec
0010
20 sec
0011
0100
40 sec
0101
50 sec
0110
60 sec
0111
70 sec
1000
80 sec
1001
90 sec
1 0 1 0 100 sec
1 0 1 1 110 sec
1 1 0 0 120 sec
1 1 0 1 130 sec
1 1 1 0 140 sec
1 1 1 1 150 sec
CNG detect period after TAD

answers
Sets the period during which CNG is detected after

the TAD answers an incoming call.
Switch 3 2 1 0
Time
0000
0 sec
0001
0010
20 sec
0011
30 sec
0100
40 sec
0101
50 sec
0110
60 sec
0111
70 sec
1000
80 sec
1001
90 sec
1 0 1 0 100 sec
1 0 1 1 110 sec
1 1 0 0 120 sec
1 1 0 1 130 sec
1 1 1 0 140 sec
1 1 1 1 150 sec
TAD plays Outgoing message
TAD records Incoming message
CNG detection is active
CNG detection is active
(Adjusted by Memory switch 64, bit 0-3)
(Adjusted by Memory switch 64, bit 4-7)
3-77

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Adjustment of CI detect time
Sets the time added to or reduced from the CI

detect time.
Switch 7 6 5 4 3
11111
11101
:
01001
00111
00101
00011
00000
00010
00100
00110
01000
:
11100
11110
Factory use only

Factory use only
Beep if fax handset hang up
0: Yes
1: No
Time
150 msec
140 msec
:
40 msec
30 msec
20 msec
10 msec
0 msec
-10 msec
-20 msec
-30 msec
-40 msec
:
-140 msec
-150 msec
Initial setting
Determines if your machine beeps when having left

the faxs handset hanging up after communication.
3-78
Memory Switch 070 - Operation

7
Initial
Setting
0
5
4
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Display error line

0: No
1: Yes
Tonal line monitor
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Sort autodialer printout
0: Sort by autodialer location
1: Sort by location ID
Print check message if power
is lost
0: No
1: Yes
Print page if error occurs
during memory transmission
0: No
1: Yes
Print check message
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
The number of error lines contained in the received

data will be shown in the LCD.
Allows fax communication to be heard through the
monitor speaker.
Specifies how entries on autodialer printouts are

sorted.
In the event of two power losses in a 40-hour
period, documents will be lost. When power is
restored, a check message will print.
For easy identification, the first page of a document
stored for memory transmission will print along a
check message if an error occurs during memory
transmission.
To notify the user of an error, a check message can
be printed if a communication error occurs.
3-79
Memory Switch 071 --- Operation

7
6
5
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
4
3
0
1
2
1
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Print TCR with the original
page during memory
transmission when the result
is NG
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Print TCR with the original
page during memory
transmission when the result
is OK
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Display modem speed
0: No
1: Yes

TCR when the transmission result is NG.

TCR when the transmission result is OK.
The transmit/receive speed is displayed in the LCD.
Memory switch071 Print TCR with the original page

Switch 3
Switch 5
When Memory transmission was OK,
When Memory transmission was NG,
When all broadcast transmissions were OK,
When some broadcast transmissions were NG,
0
0
No
No
No
No
1
1
No
Yes
No
Yes
0
Yes
No
Yes
No
1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Initial
Setting
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Erase polled document
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Usage/Comments
Determines if a document stored for polling is

erased after being polled.
3-80

7
6
5
4
3
2
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Security functions
0: Disable
1: Enable
Factory use only
Factory use only
3-81
Memory Switch 097 --- Other functions

7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
1
2
1
0
1
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Day light saving time

(Summer time) start month
This switch sets the month when the day light saving time (summer time) begins.
Switch 7 6 5 4
Time

0000
March

0001
January

0010
February

0011
March
Initial setting

0100
April

0101
May

0110
June

0111
July

1000
August

1001
September

1010
October

1011
November

1011
December
This switch sets the month when the day light saving time (summer time) begins.
Switch 3 2 1 0 Time

0 0 0 0 Sunday 1:00 of the last week

0 0 0 1 Sunday 1:00 of the first week

0 0 1 0 Sunday 1:00 of the second week

0 0 1 1 Sunday 1:00 of the third week

0 1 0 0 Sunday 1:00 of the fourth week

0 1 0 1 Sunday 1:00 of the last week of
the month
Initial setting

(Summer time) start week
3-82
Memory Switch 098 --- Other functions

7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
1
0
1
0
2
1
0
1
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments

(Summer time) end month
This switch sets the month when the day light saving time (summer time) ends.
Switch 7 6 5 4
Time

0000
October

0001
January

0010
February

0011
March

0100
April

0101
May

0110
June

0111
July

1000
August

1001
September

1010
October
Initial setting

1011
November

1011
December
This switch sets the month when the day light saving time (summer time) ends.
Switch 3 2 1 0 Time

0 0 0 0 Sunday 1:00 of the last week

0 0 0 1 Sunday 1:00 of the first week

0 0 1 0 Sunday 1:00 of the second week

0 0 1 1 Sunday 1:00 of the third week

0 1 0 0 Sunday 1:00 of the fourth week

0 1 0 1 Sunday 1:00 of the last week of
the month
Initial setting

(Summer time) end week
3-83
3.4 Setting Individual Autodialer Attributes

This function allows the user to configure an individual address book entry with the settings shown in
Memory Switches 010, 011, 012 and 013.
To set the individual attributes:

1. Change memory switch 015, bit 7 to 1. (See setting 3.3.1 Setting the Memory Switches for more
information on changing memory switch 015.)
2. When the function is enabled, an Attribute option is added to the speed dial registration steps. The
extra steps showing Attribute 1, Attribute 2, Attribute 3, and Attribute 4 are added as the last step.
3. Set the individual bit positions as shown in the following table.

To change a setting, select the attribute to edit, press [Edit] and press
low the desired bit position; then press 1 or 0 to make the change.
or
until the cursor is be-
4. Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed attribute and advance to the next attribute.
5. To set the other attribute, repeat steps 3 and 4.
6. Press [Close] to close the speed dial registration.
3-84
Attribute 1 - Individual Autodialer Setting (Equivalent to Memory Switch 010)

7
Initial
Setting
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Busy tone detection

Sets this switch to 0 if the ring tone of remote unit
0: No
is mistaken for a busy signal.
1: Yes
Fallback pattern (bps)
2400
4800
7200
9600 14400
Set at 0: 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times 2 times
Set at 1: 4 times 1 times 1 times 1 times 1 times
Overseas mode
Re-enables echo suppression that is disabled by
0: No
the CED signal (2100 Hz). Also ignores the first DIS
1: Yes
signal and transmits the DCS signal in response to
the second DIS signal.
V.29 Echo Protect tone
International telephone lines equipped with echo
0: No
suppression will cut the beginning portion of the
1: Yes
transmitted information which may cause the
receiver not to receive the training and data. To
protect the received image from degrading, a 0.5
second Echo Protect tone is placed prior to the
training using G3 high-speed modem training
(V.29).
Maximum transmit speed (kbps)
2.4 4.8 7.2 9.6 12 14.4 16.8 19.2 21.6 24 26.4 28.8 31.2 33.6
0 0 0 0 0 0
0
0
1
1 1
1
1
1
0 0 0 0 1 1
1
1
0
0 0
0
1
1
0 0 1 1 0 0
1
1
0
0 1
1
0
0
0 1 0 1 0 1
0
1
0
1 0
1
0
1
3-85

Switch
7
Initial
Setting
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
The time between reception of CFR and transmission of data

When CFR and data overlap due to line echo, increase the interval between CFR
and data transmission using this switch.
250 ms 500 ms 750 ms 1000 ms

Switch 7 0
0
1
1
Switch 6 0
1
0
1
Interval between DCS and TCF
When FTT is received after DCS and TCF signals due to line echo, increase the
interval between DCS and TCF signals using this switch.
0
Switch 5
Switch 4
3
2
1
0
1
0
0
1
75 ms 300 ms 450 ms 600 ms

0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Output attenuation
See table
below.
Output attenuation when individual autodialer attributes are set.

Switch
3
2
1
0
-15
dB
1
1
1
1
-14
dB
1
1
1
0
-13
dB
1
1
0
1
-12
dB
1
1
0
0
-11
dB
1
0
1
1
-10
dB
1
0
1
0
-9
dB
1
0
0
1
3-86
-8
dB
1
0
0
0
-7
dB
0
1
1
1
-6
dB
0
1
1
0
-5
dB
0
1
0
1
-4
dB
0
1
0
0
-3
dB
0
0
1
1
-2
dB
0
0
1
0
-1
dB
0
0
0
1
-0
dB
0
0
0
0

7
6
5
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Changing the date format of
the transmitted TTI
0: No
1: Yes
TTI transmit
0: No
1: Yes
Usage/Comments
When set to 1, the machine changes the date

format of the transmitted TTI from MM: DD: YY, or
vice versa.
When set at 0, transmission of the TTI is disabled.
The TTI includes the followings:
Sender name
Sender
s fax number
Data & time, and number of pages
To set the individually
transmission of them, see

Memory SW 016.
The time limit to receive the response signal for the
ECM post message.
(Note: Turning TTI

transmission off may violate
local or federal regulations.)
ECM response time
0: 3 sec
1: 4.8 sec
ECM error retransmit time
The time limit before the ECM error is retransmitted.
0: 200 ms
1: 400 ms
Interval between DIS and DCS
Switch 1
Switch 0
0 ms 500 ms 1000 ms 1500 ms

0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1

7
Initial
Setting
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
ANSam detection
0: Yes
1: No
During the V8 handshake, if some noise disturbs

the handshake and an error occurs, set to 1.
V.34 transmission
0: Yes
1: No
Individual setting for V.34 transmission.
5
4
0
0
2
1
0
1
0
0
Factory use only

ECM mode
0: On
1: Off
Retransmit automatically
when receiving RTN/PIN
signals
0: Yes
1: No
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Determines ECM mode. ECM mode reduces

document memory and may lengthen transmission
and reception times.
When set to 1, retransmission disables
automatically if receiving RTN/PIN signals.
3-87
3.5 Unique Switch Adjustment

3.5.1 Setting the Unique Switches
maintains these settings if power is lost.
2. Select Switch Edit and press [Enter].
or
4. Press [Enter].
5. To navigate through the unique switch settings:

Press or of the cursor key to move the cursor.
Press <0> or <1> on the numeric keypad, or or , to change the bit value.
Press [Enter] to save the setting of the displayed unique switch and return to the unique
switch edit screen.
Press [Cancel] not to save the setting of the displayed unique switch.
6. If you want to set other unique switches, repeat step 3-5. Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
3.5.2 Clearing the Unique Switches

Resets the unique switches to factory defaults.
2. Select Switch Clear and press [Enter].
3. Press [Yes]. The unique switches will reset to factory defaults.

Note: To finish the operation without clearing the switches, press [No].
4. Press <Reset> o return the machine to standby.
3-88
Unique Switch 000 Dialer

7
6
Initial
Setting
0
0
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Congestion tone detection
0: No
1: Yes
Ring back tone wait time
(seconds)
3.0 3.3 3.6 3.9
Switch 5: 0
0
1
1
Switch 4: 0
1
0
1
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Setting this switch to 0 ignores telephone line

congestion tones.
Sets the time until the ring back tone begins after
answering an incoming call in the Fax/Tel Ready or
Tel/Fax Ready mode.

7
6
5
4
3
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Enable the 1st tone key
0: No
1: Yes
Enable the 2nd tone key
0: No
1: Yes
Enable the dial prefix key
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Unique Switch 002 --- Factory use only

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
The period before detecting
busytone after dialing
Switch 3 2 1 0
1111
1110
1000
0111
0110
0101
0100
0011
0010
0001
0000
Unique Switch 004 ~ 009 --- Factory use only

3-89
Time
1500 ms
1400 ms
800 ms
700 ms
600 ms
500 ms
400 ms (Initial setting)
300 ms
200 ms
100 ms
0 ms
Unique Switch 010 Transmission

7
6
5
Initial
Setting
1
0
1
2
1
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
TTI reduction in normal mode
0: No
1: Yes
TTI reduction in fine and
superfine mode
0: No
1: Yes
Including TTI inside the
document
0: No
1: Yes
Determine wheter to transmit the TTI information

reduceted 50% in vertical direction.
Determine wheter to transmit the TTI information
reduceted 50% in vertical direction.
Setting this switch to 0 transmit the document
length added with the TTI. Setting it to 1 transmit
the length including TTI inside the document.
However in this case, the image at the top of the
document might be overlapped with TTI.
(TTI length: 4.2mm)
Factory use only

The number of times PPR is detected during ECM transmission
1 time 2 times 3 times 4 times
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
3-90

Switch
7
Initial
Setting
1
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Note: This setting takes effect only when Unique
Switch 016 -2 is set to 1.
Determine whether to send the result of reception
to the sender in relayed reception and F-code relay
reception
Send result to the sender in

relayed reception
0: No
1: Yes
Not used
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
V.8 handshake in real time
Tx
0: No
1: Yes
Determine whether the to do handshaking with V.8

recommendation if real time transmission.

Switch
7
Initial
Setting
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Available *, # and space

upon F-code box registration
0: No
1: Yes
Available *, # and space
upon F-code communicating
0: No
1: Yes
Ignore space in F-code ID
0: Yes
1: No
F-code sub-frame off
0: Send
1: Not send
Send F-code boxs TTI
0: No
1: Yes
Send not-delivered-report to
the sender machine
0: No
1: Yes
Retrieve document
0: No
1: Yes
Ignore F-code bit
0: No
1: Yes
Determines if the * (asterisk), # (sharp) and space

are available upon F-code box registration.
Determines if the * (asterisk), # (sharp) and space
are available upon F-code communicating.
Determines if checking the space stored in the
F-code ID.
Do not send the sub-address and password of
F-code box when a point of sending DCS signal
after EOM signal.
Transmit the sub-address and box name of F-code
box with F-code polling document.
If this switch is activated, the machine send the
not-delivered-report to the sender machine at relay
transmission.
If Unique Switch 015-6 is also activated, the machine sends the result report instead of the nondelivered-report.
Retrieve the document received in F-code
SecureMail box by polling transmission.
Neglect SEP bit of DTC signal or SUB bit of DCS
signal at F-code polled transmission.
Note: The F-code communication is possible the SecureMail and Polling operation using the F-code
(SUB/SEP/PWD/SID). However, it is not based on T.33 recommendation.
3-91

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
JBIG transmission
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Determines if the JBIG transmission is available.
Unique Switch 018 --- Transmission

7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
0
2
1
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Disconnect the line when
the transmission speed falls
down under 7200 bps
0: No
1: Yes
Disconnect the line when
the transmission speed falls
down under 4800 bps
0: No
1: Yes
Not used
Not used
Transmission when disable to
detect first NSF in real time
transmission.
0: Retry to detect NSF
1: Transmit with the standard
protocol
Determine if the machine disconnect the phone line

when the transmission speed fall down under 7200
bps.
Determine if the machine disconnect the phone line
when the transmission speed fall down under 4800
bps.
Determines the action when disable to detect first

NSF in real time transmission.
3-92
Unique Switch 020 Reception

7
6
5
4
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
No use
Transmit CED signal
0: No
1: Yes
Pseudo-ring start time
(seconds)
5 6 8 10
Switch 3: 0 0 1
1
Switch 2: 0 1 0
1
Printout the pages completed
to receive during receiving
into memory
0: No
1: Yes
Factoriy use only
Determines if sending CED signal.

Sets the time the pseudo-ring begins after
answering an incoming call.
(Fax/Tel Ready or Tel/Fax Ready mode only.)
Determines if whether to printout the page which

data is completed to receive during receiving it into
faxs memory.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
Initial
Setting
0
1
1
0
1
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
TCF check time
(in 100 ms units)
Usage/Comments
If the TCF time is such that poor image quality is the

result, lengthen the TCF check time.
Switch 3 2 1 0
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
3-93
Time
0 ms
100 ms
200 ms
300 ms
400 ms
500 ms
600 ms
700 ms
900 ms
1000 ms
1100 ms
1200 ms
1300 ms
1400 ms
1500 ms

7
6
5
4
3
Initial
Setting
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
JBIG reception
0: No
1: Yes
Receive the junk fax
0: Yes
1: No
Usage/Comments
Determines how documents from the remote fax are

received.
When the block junk fax feature is set to Mode 2
and the fax does not receive the TSI signal from the
remote fax, determine if receiving the fax other than
the remote fax number set to the block junk dial list.
Factory use only

Factory use only

7
6
5
4
3
2
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Not used
Receiving fax in 600 dpi
(S-fine)
0
: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Usage/Comments
Sets whether to receive fax in 600 dpi.
3-94
Unique Switch 030 Modem

7
6
5
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
3429 baud symbol rate when
communicating at V.34
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
0: No
1: Yes
If the error frame often occurs because of the

symbol rate is too high, setting this switch to
1 mask that symbol rate and keep down the
occurrence of error frame.
See above (switch 5 to 2).
Unique Switch 031 Factory use only

Unique Switch 032 Modem
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
Switch
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
ANSam output time
0: 3 sec
1: 4 sec
Factory use only
Usage/Comments
The time limit to output the ANSam (A sinewave

signal at 2100 Hz amplitude-modulated). Sets to 1
when the V.8 handshake is hard to achieve.
3-95
Unique Switch 040 Scanner

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factiory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Resolution in Photo mode
transmission
0: Superfine
1: Hyperfine
Superfine: 8x15.4dot/mm
Hyperfine: 16x15.4dot/mm

7
Initial
Setting
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Set the fixed ratio for copy

and the auto ratio in detail
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Rotate and store in memory
0: No
1: Yes
When set to 1, the ratio will be calculated in detail

automatically according to the document size and
the recording paper size.
Note: This setting takes effect only when the

totate reception is activated.
Rotate an A4 and store it as A4 document in
memory.

7
6
5
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
2
1
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Confirmation stamp stamping

time Adjustment
Adjust the time length to stamp.
Scanner heater
0: On
1: Off
Stop scanning by each page
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
The optional scanner heater turns on / off.
Switch 7 6 5
111
110
101
100
010
001
000
Time
700 ms
600 ms
500 ms
400 ms
200 ms
100 ms
Turn this switch on, when document jam occurs

frequently in time-consuming scanning such as
enlarge scanning.
3-96

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Motor stopping period for
Confirmation stamp
This determines the period from ADF motor stop to

stamping the confirmation stamp.
Switch 3 2 1
Settings
1 1 1
700 ms
1 1 0
600 ms
1 0 1
500 ms
1 0 0
400 ms
0 1 1
300 ms
0 1 0
200 ms
0 0 1
100 ms
0 0 0
100 ms
Factory use only

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Left side edge document
margin adjustment
Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1

:
1 1 1 1 0 0

:
1 1 0 0 1 0

:
1 0 1 0 0 0

:
0 1 1 1 1 0

:
0 1 0 1 0 1

:
0 0 0 1 0 1

:
0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 0

0.4233 mm.
Left side means the side of
the scanning position.
3-97
Settings
26.67 mm
25.40 mm
21.17 mm
16.93 mm
12.70 mm
8.47 mm
4.23 mm
0.42 mm
0.0 mm

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Right side edge document
margin adjustment
0.4233 mm.
Right side means the
opposite side of the scanning
position.
Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 1 1 1 1 1

:
1 1 1 1 0 0

:
1 1 0 0 1 0

:
1 0 1 0 0 0

:
0 1 1 1 1 0

:
0 1 0 1 0 1

:
0 0 0 1 0 1

:
0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 0
Settings
26.67 mm
25.40 mm
21.17 mm
16.93 mm
12.70 mm
8.47 mm
4.23 mm
0.42 mm
0.0 mm

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
margin adjustment upon
scanning using FBS.
Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0
000000
000001
000010
000011
000100
000101
000110
000111
001000
001001
001010
001011
001100
001101
001110
001111
010000
010001
010010
010011
010100
010101
010110
010111
011000
011001
:
111111

margin when scanning
document by FBS.
1 mm.
3-98
Settings
0 mm
1 mm
2 mm
3 mm
4 mm
5 mm
6 mm
7 mm
8 mm
9 mm
10 mm
11 mm
12 mm
13 mm
14 mm
15 mm
16 mm
17 mm
18 mm
19 mm
20 mm
21 mm
22 mm
23 mm
24 mm
25 mm
63 mm

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
margin adjustment upon
scanning using FBS
Switch 5 4 3 2 1 0
000000
000001
000010
000011
000100
000101
000110
000111
001000
001001
001010
001011
001100
001101
001110
001111
010000
010001
010010
010011
010100
010101
010110
010111
011000
011001
:
:
111111
Adjusts the trailing edge

margin when scanning
document by FBS.
1 mm.
3-99
Settings
0 mm
1 mm
2 mm
3 mm
4 mm
5 mm
6 mm
7 mm
8 mm
9 mm
10 mm
11 mm
12 mm
13 mm
14 mm
15 mm
16 mm
17 mm
18 mm
19 mm
20 mm
21 mm
22 mm
23 mm
24 mm
25 mm
63 mm
Unique Switch 050 Printer

7
6
Initial
Setting
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Smoothing in list printing
0: No
1: Yes
Smoothing S-Fine mode
(200 x 400 dpi) mode Rotate
receiption
0: No
1: Yes
Smoothing in Normal mode
Rotate receiption
0: No
1: Yes
Smoothing in H-Fine (400 x
400 dpi) mode
0: No
1: Yes
Smoothing in S-Fine (200 x
400 dpi) mode
0: No
1: Yes
Smoothing in Fine mode
0: No
1: Yes
Smoothing in Normal mode
0: No
1: Yes
Smoothes the data scanned in each resolution

mode.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
Adjust
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Reduce print
0: No
1: Yes
Usage/Comments
If the received fax is larger than the paper in the

cassettes, setting this switch to 1 means the
document will be printed on one page by reduction.

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Printing margin adjustment
0: Normal
1: No margin
3-100

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printer density adjustment.
Switch
76543210
Settings
00000000
00000001
00000010
00000011
00000100
Not available
Lightest
:
:

00000110

00000011
:
00001001
00001011
:
Normal Initial setting

Darkest
Not available

Unique Switch 057 Remote reception
7
6
5
Initial
Setting
1
0
0
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Paper selection priority
0: Less margin
1: Same paper width
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
e.g. B5 size is received:

0 will print them on to A4 papers
1 will print them on to B4 papers

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Printable pages after

Replace Toner or Relpace
Durm appeared
1
0
0
1
0
0
3-101
Switch
76543210
11111111
:
11001000
:
10010110
:
01100100
:
00110010
:
00000001
00000000
Toner/Drum
255 / 2550 pages
200 / 2000 pages
150 / 1500 pages
100 / 1000 pages
50 / 500 pages
1 / 10 page
0 page
Unique Switch 067 Remote reception and TAD interface

7
Initial
Setting
0
5
4
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Start detecting the busy tone

before pseudo-ring ringing
starts
0: No
1: Yes
Detect busy tone during
pseudo-ring ringing
0: No
1: Yes
No use
CNG detection during OGM
output in ANS Ready
0: Yes
1: No
Number of detection DTMF
Sets the number of detection the DTMF during

Ans/Fax Ready mode.
Switch 3 2 1 0
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1111
3-102
Number of detection
Not detect
1
2
3 Initial setting
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
15

7
Initial
Setting
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Fixing the service report fax

number
0: No (able to edit)
1: Yes (unable to edit)
The line voltage that TEL1
and TEL2 are regarded as
off-hooked.
When set to 1, the fax number entered in service

report setting Location 1 will be unable to edit by
the user.
Switch 7654321

3-103
1111111
:
1100100
:
1010000
:
1 10010
:
0011110
:
0010100
:
0001010
:
0000101
:
0000010
0000001
0000000
Settings
127 volt
100 volt
80 volt
50 volt
30 volt
20 volt
10 volt
5 volt
2 volt
1 volt
0 volt
Unique Switch 070 Operation

7
6
Initial
Setting
0
1
5
4
1
0
3
2
0
0
1
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

LCD error message
0: Remains in LCD
1: Returns to standby
Buzzer/keypad volume
After an error message has printed, the setting of

this switch determines if the error message will
remain in the display.
Switch OFF Low Medium Maximum
5
0
0
1
1
4
0
1
0
1
Factory use only

Standby mode priority
0: Copy
1: Fax
Factory use only
Factory use only

7
Initial
Setting
1
5
4
3
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Line monitor in Quick memory

transmission
0: Off
1: On
Switch LCD language
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Rx document to polling
document
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
If this switch is set to on, the LCD language is

available to switch from Chinese to English and
Japanese, by pressing <Menu> and <#>.
Retrieve the document received in the memory by

polling transmission.
3-104

7
6
5
4
3
2
Initial
Setting
0
0
1
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Send service report
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Transmit consumable order
sheet
0: No
1: Yes
If this switch is set to 1, the machine will transmit

the consumable order sheet automatically when the
drum cartridge is near end of its design life or the
toner cartridge is near empty.
Note: For this feature to work correctly, you must
register several items. See 3.16 Consumable
order sheet page 3-132.

Switch
7
Initial
Setting
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Print consumable order sheet

0: No
1: Yes
If this switch is set to 1, the machine will print the

consumable order sheet automatically when the
drum cartridge is near end of its design life or the
toner cartridge is near empty.
Note: For this feature to work correctly, you must
register several items. See 3.16 Consumable
order sheet page 3-132.
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
3-105

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
1
1
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Priority of consumable order
sheet printing
0: Print after the current
printing job is completed
1: Print immediately
Print the transmission time
on TCR
0: Print the transmit time
1: Blank
When receive a fax message
during Auto power off mode,
the LCD will be in standby
mode
0: No
1: Yes
When the drum cartridge has reached its design life,

or the toner cartridge is empty, the machine prints a
consumable order sheet.
When this switch is set at 0, the machine will
not print consumable order sheet until the current
printing job is finished.
When set to 0, the transmission time will be
printed on TCR.

7
6
5
4
3
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
1
2
1
0
0
1
1
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Journal list printing order
0: From old history
1: From new history
Period to press the <Energy
Save> to go to sleep mode
Switch 2 1 0
111
110
101
100
011
010
001
3-106
Time
7 seconds
6 seconds
5 seconds
4 seconds
3 seconds
2 seconds
1 second

Unique Switch 084 Miscellaneous
Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Does not send the

consumable order sheet in
toner near empty condition.
The value set with this switch (printed pages) will

be compared with the value counted up in life monitor (printed pages after the toner is replaced). If this
value is larger than the value in life monitor when
the machine goes to toner near empty condition,
the installed toner is not considered as new toner
and the consumable order sheet will not be printed.
3-107
Switch 76543210
11111111
:
01100100
:
0110010
:
00010100
:
00001010
:
00000101
:
00000010
00000001
00000000
Settings
12750 pages
5000 pages
2500 pages
1000 pages
500 pages
250 pages (initial setting)
100 pages
50 pages
0

7
6
Initial
Setting
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Print/Send the consumable
order sheet when the drum is
near end
0: Yes
1: No
Print/Send the consumable
order sheet when toner is
near empty
0: Yes
1: No
Print the receive time stamp
within the document
0: No
1: Yes
Next doc default setting
when scanning with ADF
0: No
1: Yes
Next doc default setting
when scanning with FBS
0: No
1: Yes
Enlarging the 24 dot-fontcharacters
0: Yes
1: No
Muti-T.30 monitor journal
number
0: No
1: Yes
Note: For this feature to
work correctly, you must
register several items. See 3.16
Consumable
order sheet
page
3-132.
Note: For this feature to
work correctly, you must
register several items. See 3.16
Consumable
order sheet
page
3-132.
Deterimine whether to print the receive time stamp
within the document print area or not.
Determine the default setting for Next doc
scanning with ADF.
If it is set to 0 the default setting for Next doc is
No, if is 1 the setting is Yes.
Determine the default setting for Next doc
scanning with FBS.
If it is set to 0 the default setting for Next doc is
No, if is 1 the setting is Yes.
Determine to print the characters on cover page or
Tx report to 150% or not.
If this setting is Yes, the journal report will be
printed not in the consecuted number but in the
table number to see the T.30 monitor.

7
Initial
Setting
0
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Add TSI infromation to the
receive time stamp
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Usage/Comments
Determine to add the senders fax number to the
receive stamp or not.
3-108

7
6
5
4
3
2
Initial
Setting
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
Switch
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only
Print the sending document
on the error massage sheet
0: No
1: Yes
Factory use only
Shortcut the fax number on
the journal list
0: No
1: Yes
Determine whether to print only the last 25

characters of the fax number on the journal list and
replace the rest with ....

Switch
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Initial
Setting
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
Adjust
Usage/Comments
Reaction time to the keys on

the touch screen
Switch 7 6 5 4
1111
1110
0101
0100
0010
0001
0000
Factory use only

Factory use only
Factory use only
Factory use only

3-109
Time
150 ms
140 ms
50 ms
20 ms
10 ms
0 ms
3.6 Clear Programmed Data / User Settings

User programmed information such as address book entries, date, time, Transmit Terminal Identifier
(TTI), Subscriber ID, etc., are stored in the units Random Access Memory (RAM). A battery back up
holds this information, when the power is lost.
This function does not clear the machine parameters, memory switches and unique switches.
Therefore, this setting is useful to reset the user-programmed information but leave specific
parameters and switches configured for a particular telephone system, etc.
To reset only each switch, see page 3-3, 3-62 and 3-88.
Note: If desired, the All RAM Clear setting can be used to erase all users programmed information, all
documents in memory, and reset the memory switches and unique switches to factory defaults.
For information on the All RAM Clear setting, see the next page.
1. To clear programmed data and user settings, from standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <2>.
2. Press [Yes].
Note: To finish the operation without performing initialization, press [No].
3.7 All RAM Clear

The All RAM Clear setting will erase all user-programmed information, all documents in memory, and
reset the memory switches and unique switches to factory defaults.
This feature may also be used to try and clear a machine malfunction or lock up. If possible, when the
All RAM Clear is used to reset a malfunction or lock up, it is advisable to print the machine settings,
one-touch and speed dial listings to help in reprogramming this information.
Note: The All RAM Clear does not clear the machine parameters, life monitor and consumable order
sheet. If you need to clear them, see Clearing the machine parameters, page 3-3 or Clear Life
Monitor page 3-136 or Clear consumable order sheet on page 3-135.
1. To perform an All RAM Clear, from standby, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <3>.
2. Press [Yes].
Note: To finish the operation without performing RAM clear, press [No].
3-110
3.8 T.30 Monitor

In all binary coded facsimile control procedures the HDLC frame structure is utilized. The basic HDLC
structure is shown below.
Preamble
Binary coded infromation
Non-stabdard facilities frame(NSF) Called subscriber identification frame (CSI) Digital identification frame (DIS)
Flag
Flag
Address
Control
Facsimili
contorl
field
Facsimili
information
field
Frame
checing
sequence (FCS)
The information in this

protion is printed in the T.30
monitor.
The control signal is identified by FCF (Facsimile Control Field). Additional 8-bit octet information
follows FIF (Facsimile Information Field) and FC (Facsimile Control Field) to further clarify facsimile
procedures. This is added to DIS, DCS, DTC, CIS, CIG, TSI, NSC, NSF, and NSS signals.
3.8.1 Print T.30 Monitor

This mode causes the unit to print a G3 procedural summary of the last fax communication.
2. Press [Yes] to print the T.30 Monitor list.
3.8.2 Multi T.30 Monitor

The communications on the journal list are able to print.
1. Set the unique switch for Multi T.30 monitor to "1 (On)". (Unique switch 85 switch 0 )
2. Print the journal list and check the communication number of which to print the T.30 Monitor.
4. Enter the communication number and press [Enter].

5. Press [Yes] to print the T.30 Monitor list.
3-111
3.8.3 How to see the print out

(Example for fax transmission)
3-112
(Example for fax receipt ion)
TxFrame : Signals sent by machine printing T.30 report

RxFrame : Signals received from remote machine
DATA: Additional 8-bit octet information to clarify facsimile procedures. In the list, the data are
in hexadecimal digits. At the top of each data shows the type of the signal.
TCF : TCF check sequence
PIX : Image data
[V17 MMR A3 0 F E]

Error Correction Mode (E=ECM on, page=EMC off)
Mode (U=Ultra fine: 600 x 600 dpi, H= Hyper fine: 400 x 400 dpi,
F=Fine, N=Normal)
Receiver's minimum scan line time capability
Recording width document size
Compressing method
Data signalling rate
3-113
NSF, NSC, NSS:

NSF, NSC, NSS are nonstandard unit frames. The first three bytes of the FIF are specified by T.30.
The subsequent digits are individually determined by the manufacturers. The first byte refers to the
country code. The second byte is a spare; it is 00 (hex) presently. The third byte is the manufacturer
code.
TxFrame
RxFrame
NSF
DATA
20 00 00 45 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
The third byte is the manufactures code
The second byte is spare; currently set at 00H
The first byte indicates the country code
Indicates the NSF code
CSI, CIG, TSI:

CSI, CIG, TSI is composed of a maximum 20-digit number comprising the country code, area code,
and subscribers telephone number. In the printed results, printing starts from the least significant digit
of the telephone number. The following code table lists the codes used to make the 20-digit number
and their value. Below the code table is a CSI example.
Code
20
30
31
Value
Space
0
1
Code
32
33
34
Value
2
3
4
Code
35
36
37
Value
5
6
7
Code
38
39
2B
Value
8
9
+
An example telephone number of 123-456-7890 is represented as:

TxFrame
CIS
RxFrame
DATA
30 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 20 20 20 20 20 20
0
20 20 20 20 20
DIS, DTC, DCS:

DIS, DTC, DCS frames define the standard CCITT capabilities of the two units such as transmit and
receive speeds, coding methods, printer speed, etc.
TxFrame
DIS
RxFrame
DATA
00 EF F9 C4 80 81 80 00
The bits are in the following order:

( 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1) (16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9) (24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17)
(32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25) (40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33) (48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41)
(56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49) (64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57)
Table for hexadecimal digit to binary number:
Hex
Binary
Hex
Binary
0
0000
4
0100
1
0001
5
0101
2
0010
6
0110
3
0011
7
0111
Hex
8
9
A
B
Binary
1000
1001
1010
1011
So in the above list the first "EF" is "11101111"(bit order 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1)
3-114
Hex
C
D
E
F
Binary
1100
1101
1110
1111
A transmission with PPR signal:

The error frame in fax reception is identified using the post-message signal and PPR signal.
TxFrame RxFrame
PPS MPS
PPR
DATA
BF 4F 00 00 0F
BC F0 00 FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF
In PPS signal FIF, the pages, blocks and frames are displayed one value less than the real value.
So in the above case:
Pages: 00 means one page
Blocks: 00 means one block
Frames:
0F means 16 frames
In PPR signal FIF, the error frame will be displayed with "1". In the above case the fist frame is "F0"
and it means there was an error from frame 4 to 7.
3-115
3.9 Printer maintenance mode

In case of followings, use this mode.
When you
have
replaced the Fuser unit and/
or Transfer roller.
When Call Service: XX
message appear in the LCD, access this mode to determine the cause of
the Call Service: XX
error message.

When you replace the Fuser unit or Transfer roller, you must set the count of replacement
manually
To access the printer maintenance mode:

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <6>.
The mode is contained within two main menu levels.
2. Select Enter Replace Counter, and press [Enter].

3. The LCD shows:
4. Select either Replace Fuser or Replace Transfer according to the parts you have replaced, and
press [Enter].
If you have selected Replace Fuser, the LCD shows:
5. Press [YES]. The machine goes back to standby mode.

When Call Service : XX

message
is displayed o
n the LCD
To access the printer maintenance modes for determine the cause of the Call Service: XX
error
message.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <6>.
2. Select Service Call and press [Enter].
3. The kind of printer error will be displayed. If happens two or more troubles, the number of troubles
is displayed on the right upper of the LCD. For example, when Heater error and Drum Fuse
Error has occurred, the LCD shows 2.
4. Press [ENTER] to show the other printer error.
5. Press [RESET] to exit this mode.
Note: See 4.8 Call Service : XX page 4-28 for the printer error messages and an explanation of each
are outlined.
3-116
3.10 Monitor speaker

If you need to monitor the signal of fax communication, turn this mode to on. You can hear the signal
sound with machines speaker during fax transaction.
1. From standby mode, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <8>.
2. Select [On], and pree [Enter] to turn the mode on.

Note: To turn this mode off, perform step 1 and 2 by selecting [Off].
3.11 Test Modes

This mode offers the ability to print a test pattern and monitor certain unit output functions. Included
are followings.
Life Monitor
Printer Test
Stamp test mode
Port status (Factory use only)
Set Background Level
Image Quality Test (Factory use only)
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9> to enter the test mode.
2. Select the desired test mode and press [Enter].
3-117
3.11.1 Life Monitor

The life monitor displays the current software version, the total number of pages scanned, printed, and
transmitted, the number of drums replaced and the total page count on the current drum.
Note: The All RAM Clear setting does not clear the life monitor. To clear, see below.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select Life Monitorand press [Enter].
2. Pressign the curesor key up or down displayes the following values:
ROM Ver.0 = displays software version

01 to 02 = displays software version
of the optional kit
Serial No. = displays the machines serial number
Installation Date = displays the machines setup date
Scan Pages = displays total pages scanned
Print Pages = displays total pages printed
Tx Pages = displays total pages transmitted
Drum Replaced # = displays drum replaced times
Drum Life Time = displays total working seconds of current drum
Drum Life = displays total pages printed on current drum
Toner Replaced # = displays toner cartridge replaced count
Toner Life = displays total pages printed on current toner cartridge
Fuser Replaced Co = displays fuser replaced count
Fuser Life = displays total pages printed on fuser
Transfer Rplcd Co = displays transfer roller replaced count
Transfer Life = displays total pages printed on current transfer roller
3. Press [Close] to exit the display life monitor
3-118
3.11.2 Printer Test

The Printer Test mode offers seven different test patterns as shown below.

Checkered
Squares
Half-tone 1
Paper Scum

Halft-tone 2
White
Black

D
: Halftone
E
: Halftone2
F
: White
G
: Black
Ladder
Magin pattern
3-119
1. Press SETTING, *, 0, 9, then select Test Pattern Print and press [Enter].
2. Select the desired pattern displayed and press [Enter].

3. Select the paper size to test and press [Enter].
4. Press [Yes].
The selected pattern will be printed continuously.

Note: Press <STOP> to stop printing.
5. To select another pattern, repeat the steps 1 to 4.
3.11.3 Stamp test mode

This mode tests the stamp. When it is set to on, the stamp will be stamped on the document at a
regular interval.
Note: The stamp is an option unit.
1. Load test documents into the automatic document feeder (ADF).
2. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select Stamp Test mode and press [Enter].
3. Press [Enter] to start the stamp test.

4. Press <Reset> to exit the stamp test mode.
3-120
3.11.4 Port Status

This test mode is not applicable to field service of this machine.
3.11.5 Set Background Level

The background level is an established threshold used to help measure the reflective ability of a
scanned document. This threshold can change if the scanner lamp, CCD, or the ballast is replaced;
therefore this mode should be used to reset the threshold when these items are changed.
The Set Background Level mode allows the level to be set without erasing memory contents.
Note: The background seal at the inside of the scanner cover should be cleaned prior to setting the
background level to ensure an accurate reading.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, then select Background level and press [Enter].
2. Press [Start] to start the background level setting.

After the background level setting, the machine goes back to the standby mode.
3.11.6 Image quality test (OfficeBridge option only)

3-121
3.12 Print Machine Parameters, Memory Switch and

Unique Switch Settings
This function instructs the unit to print a list of the machine parameter, memory switch and unique
switch settings. The list shows the default and current settings for each. After printing, the unit returns
to standby.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <0>.
2. Press [Yes] to start printing.
3.13 Factory Functions

This factory functions provide several machine testes including LED and LCD tests, a keypad test,
memory tests, a RTC test, etc.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>.
2. To select the desired test mode, press <> or <> and scroll the list.
Prints a list of the Factory Functions
LED test
LCD test
Panel test
SRAM check
DRAM check
RTC test
Page memory check
ATDC adjustment
Generate bell test
Toner supply mode
Lamp measurement
3.13.1 Function List

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>.
2.
Select Function List and press [Enter].
3. Press [Yes].
A list of the Factory Functions will be printed

. After printing the unit will return to standby.
3-122
3.13.2 LED Test

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select LED Test.
2. Press [Enter].
Pressing <Start>, all green LEDs will turn on.

Pressing <Start> again, all red LEDs will turn on.
Pressing <Start> the third time, all LEDs will turn on.
3. Press <Stop> to exit the LED test mode.
3.13.3 LCD Test

This mode displays two test patterns in LCD.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select LCD Test.
2. Press [Enter].
Pressing <Start>, all dots will turn on.
Next pressing <Start>, all dots will turn off.
Next pressing <Start>, characters will be displayed.
3. Press <Stop> to exit the LCD test mode.
3-123
3.13.4 Panel Key Test

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select Panel Test.
2. Press [Enter].
3. As each button on the keypad is pressed, a representative name as show in the following table will
be displayed.
Key
ENERGY SAVE
Indication in LCD
EnergySave
Indication in LCD
Tenkey 1 to #
Copy
Fax
Scanner
LCD_Contrast
Fax Stop/Conf
Key
Numeric keys 0 through
#
START
STOP
INTERRUPT
SPEED DIAL
On-hook
COPY
FAX
SCAN
CONTRAST
FAX CANCEL / JOB
CONFIRM.
Panel key 1~4
ONLINE
VOICE GUIDANCE
RESET
MENU
Function 1~4
Online
Voice guidance
Reset
Menu
TTI
LIST
MACRO
M1~ M3
One-touch dial 1 ~ 56
Anykey 3
Anykey 4
Reg Key macro
key macro 1 ~ 3
Speed dial 1 ~ 56
Start
Stop
Interrupt
Anykey 1
Anykey 2
4. Press <Stop> twice to cancel the key panel test.
3.13.5 SRAM Check

This mode is used to test the SRAM memory where user programmed parameters such as date, time,
TTI, etc are stored.
Note: When this test is executed, the unit will perform an All RAM Clear.
The All RAM Clear erases all user settings and resets all memory switches, machine parameters and
unique switches to factory defaults.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select SRAM Check.
2. Press [Enter].
3. Enter the HEX code (00 ~ FF) using numeric keypad, then press <Start>. The HEX code is written
to, then read from memory. After that, the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display. Then the
machine will return to factory function. To enter A, B, C, D, E and F, see table below.
A
B
C
D
E
F
Seped dial
Macro
01
02
On-hook
M1
The data are written to, then read from each address. The results are shown in the display. If the
read/write test is successful, the display will show OK.
If some portion of the read/write test fails, the display will show NG with the address and the data
name.
4. Upon completion, the machine returns to the test mode.
3-124
3.13.6 DRAM Check

This mode is used to test the DRAM memory, or document memory.
Note: When this test is performed, an All DRAM Clear will be performed by the unit. The All RAM
clear erases all user settings and resets all memory switches, machine parameters and unique
switches to factory defaults.
This is a read/write test that requires a few moments to complete.
Note: Perform a DRAM test whenever a memory upgrade is added to the unit.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select DRAM Check.
2. Press [Enter].
3. Enter the HEX code (00 ~ FF) using numeric keypad and one-touch key [01] to [06], then press
<Start>.
4. Depending on the amount of DRAM in the unit, press 0, 1, 2, or 3 on the numeric keypad.
Please refer to the following table:
Note: Usually, press 0.
Press
0
1
2
Check area
All DRAMs
The memory on the main control board
The 32MB expansion Memory PCB
5. Press <Start>.
The machine starts checking and the result (OK/NG) will be show n in the display.
For example, if the check area is 0 and all memory area OK, you will see:
5. Press <Reset> to exit the test mode.
3-125
3.13.7 RTC(real time clock) Test

3.13.8 Page memory check

When the letters are not printed correctly, perform this test.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select Page Memory check.
2. Press [Enter].
3. Select the desired checking area and press [Enter].

4. The machine starts checking and the result (OK/NG) will be shown in the display.
If NG is shown, perform the DRAM clear (page 3-136), and then go back to step 1.
5. Press [Close] to exit the test mode.
3.13.9 ATDC adjustment

This mode adjusts the value of data read by the ATDC Sensor. When a reused drum is set to a different machine or in cased that the machine cannot memory the value, the former value must be inputted manually using this mode.
Note: Before replacing the drum to other machine or replacing the PCB Main, first use this mode to
write down the current ATDC value.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select ATDC adjustment.
2. Press [Enter].
3. Select ASTD and press [Enter].

4. Enter the ASTD value, and press [Enter].
5. Select DeltaVCONT and press [Enter].

6. Enter the DeltaVCONT value, and press [Enter].
7. Press [Close] to exit the mode.
3-126
3.13.10 Generate bell test

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select Generate Bell Test.
2. Press [Enter].
3. The bell starts ringing.
4. Press <Stop> to stop.
3.13.11 Toner supply mode

This mode forces to supply the toner to the prescribed standard ratio, when it goes down for an
unexpected reason.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <1>, then select Toner supply mode.
2. Press [Enter].
3. Select ON to activate this mode and press [Enter].
3.13.12 Lamp measurement

3-127
3.14 Line Tests

This mode offers several internal tests and ability to monitor certain unit output functions. Included are
relay tests, modem signal output monitoring, and DTMF output monitoring.
3.14.1 Relay Test

This mode tests the on/off operation of various relays and switches.
1. Press <Menu>,
<*>, <1>, <2>.

2. Select the line you want to test and press [Enter].
You can test line 1 only.
3. Select Relay Test and press [Enter].
4. Select the relay you want to test and press [Enter]. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.
OFHK_ON
L_ON
RI_ON
OFHK_ON
L_OFF
RI_OFF
H_ON
CONT24_ON
Hook key
5. Press [Close] to exit the relay test mode.
3-128
H_OFF
CONT24_OFF
3.14.2 Tonal Signal Test

The tonal signal test permits the units output tones to be monitored.
Note: To monitor the tones, an external monitoring device must be connected to the telephone line
jack.
1. Press <Menu>,
<*>, <1>, <2>.

3. Select Tonal and press [Enter].
4. Select your desired tonal signal test. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.
Refer to the table below.

Note: It may take several moments for output signal to change.
Signal
Signal
None (stop signal)
V17_2400_7200_W1_B4
400 Hz tone
V17_2400_7200_W0_B1
600 Hz tone
V17_2400_7200_W4_B1
1100 Hz tone
V17_2400_9600_W1_B0
1300 Hz tone
V17_2400_9600_W1_B1
2100 Hz tone
V17_2400_9600_W1_B4
3000 Hz tone
V17_2400_9600_W0_B1
3400 Hz tone
V17_2400_9600_W4_B1
FSK WHITE
V17_2400_12000_W1_B0
FSK BLACK
V17_2400_12000_W1_B1
FSK _W1_B1
V17_2400_12000_W1_B4
V27_1200_2400
V17_2400_12000_W0_B1
V27_1600_4800
V17_2400_12000_W4_B1
V29_2400_7200
V17_2400_14400_W1_B0
V29_2400_9600
V17_2400_14400_W1_B1
V17_2400_7200_W1_B0
V17_2400_14400_W1_B4
V17_2400_7200_W1_B1
V17_2400_14400_W0_B1
V17_2400_14400_W4_B1
Signal
V34_2400_2400 ~ 21600
V34_2800_4800 ~ 26400
V34_3000_4800 ~ 28800
V34_3200_4800 ~ 31200
V34_3429_4800 ~ 33600
VOICE
MELODY
GRBT
3-129
3.14.3 DTMF Output Test

The DTMF output test permits the units DTMF tones to be monitored.
Note: To monitor the tones, an external monitoring device must be connected to the telephone line
jack.
1. Press <Menu>,
<*>, <1>, <2>.

3. Select DTMF and press [Enter].
4. Select your desired tonal DTMF tone and press [Enter]. When it is selected, it will be highlighted.
Refer to the table below.

Note: It may take several moments for output signal to change.
Display
Signal
Display
0
DTMF0 (941 Hz 1336 Hz)
ROW1
1
DTMF1 (697 Hz 1209 Hz)
ROW2
2
DTMF2 (697 Hz 1336 Hz)
ROW3
3
DTMF3 (697 Hz 1477 Hz)
ROW4
4
DTMF4 (770 Hz 1209 Hz)
COL1
5
DTMF5 (770 Hz 1336 Hz)
COL2
6
DTMF6 (770 Hz 1477 Hz)
COL3
7
DTMF7 (852 Hz 1209 Hz)
COL4
8
DTMF8 (852 Hz 1336 Hz)
9
DTMF9 (852 Hz 1477 Hz)
AST
DTMF6* (941 Hz 1209 Hz)
SHARP
DTMF# (941 Hz 1477 Hz)
5. To stop outputting the DTMF tone, press <Stop>.
6. To select another DTMF tone, repeat steps 3-4.
Otherwise, proceed to step 7.
7. To exit the DTMF output test, press <Menu> under not tests.
3-130
Signal
ROW1 (697 Hz)
ROW2 (770 Hz)
ROW3 (852 Hz)
ROW4 (941 Hz)
COL1 (1209 Hz)
COL2 (1336 Hz)
COL3 (1447 Hz)
COL4 (1633 Hz)
3.15 Mirror Carriage Transfer Mode

Important: The fax machine is shipped with mirror carriage locking plate for protecting the machine
s mirror carriage during shipping. When installing the fax, slide the scanner locking knob
back to its unlocking position. Then turn the power on and perform the following:
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <4>.
2. Select [Off].
Important: If reshipping, turn on this mode to move the mirror carriage to the transport position. Then
power off and turn locking pins to the mirror carriage lock position.
3-131
3.16 Consumable order sheet

When the drum cartridge is near end of its design life or the toner cartridge is near empty, the machine
prints (or transmit) the consumable sheet.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Dealers fax number

Customers name
Customers address
Customers account
Serial number of the unit
Customers telephone number
Customers fax number registered by Initial
setting mode
Order item
Description of the order item
Quantity of the order item
Dealers name
Dealers code
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Dealers telephone number

Dealers fax number
Comments
Customers sign
Customers sign (Block letter)
Drum rotate time (x 10 seconds)
Drum life time
20
21
22
Drum used percentage

Total print pages
Number of pirnted pages after toner or
drum was replaced.
23
ROM version
3-132
3.16.1 Set consumable order sheet

1. Clear the junk data, if necessary (see Clear consumable order sheet, page 3-135).
2. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <5>.
3. Select Consumable Order Sheet and press [Enter].
4. Press Dealer Name and press [Enter].

Enter the Dealers name. The code may be up to 30 characters in length.
5. Press [Enter] to save the dealers name.

6. Select Dealer Tel No and press [Enter].
Enter the distributors telephone number. The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length.
To enter the numbers, use the numeric keypad.
7. Press [Enter] to save the dealers telephone number.

8. Select Dealer Fax No and press [Enter].
Enter the dealers fax number. The fax number may be up to 20 characters in length.
9. Press [Enter] to save the dealers fax number.

10. Select Cust Account # and press [Enter].
Enter the customers account number. The customers account number may be up to 10 characters in length.
11. Press [Enter] to save the customers code.
3-133
12. Select Cust Name and press [Enter].

Enter the customers account number. The customers account number may be up to 30 characters in length.
13. Press [Enter] to save the customers name.

14. Select Address 1 and press [Enter].
Enter the customers address for the upper row. The customers address may be up to 14 characters in length.
15. Press [Enter] to save the customers address for the upper row.
16. Select Address 2 and press [Enter].
Enter the customers address for the lower row. The customers address may be up to 14 characters in length.
17. Press [Enter] to save the customers address for the lower row.
18. Select Cust Tel.
Enter the customers phone number. The phone number may be up to 20 characters in length.
19. Press [Enter] to save the customers phone number.

20. Select Unit Serial # and press [Enter].
Enter the MFPs serial number. The number may be up to 18 characters in length.
21. Press [Enter] to save the MFPs serial number.
3-134
22. Select Order Sheet Setting and press [Enter].

Determine if the machine prints or transmit the consumable order sheet when the printer consumable is near end of its designed life.
If OFF is selected, the machine does not print or transmit the consumable order sheet even
though the printer consumable is near end of its designed life.
23. Press [Enter] save the setting.

24. Press [Close] to go back to the Consumable Orders Sheet mode.
3.16.2 Clear consumable order sheet

The consumable order sheet keeps several items, these are not clear the all RAM clear function
(Menu *, 0, 3). To clear the information of consumable order sheet:
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <5>.
2. Select Clear Order Sheet and press [Enter].
3. To clear the information of consumable order sheet, press [Yes].

To finish the operation without clearing, press [No].
3.16.3 Print consumable order sheet

To check the customers information has been registered correctly, print the consumable order sheet.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <5>.
2. Select Order Sheet List and press [Enter].
3. Press [Yes].
3-135
3.17 DRAM Clear

Note: Perform a DRAM clear whenever a memory upgrade is installed to the unit or the DRAM is
replaced.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <6>.
2. Press [Yes]. The DRAM will be cleared.

3. After clearing, turn the power OFF and ON.
3.18 Clear Life Monitor

The life monitor keeps a count of the pages scanned, printed, and transmitted, along with the drum
replacement count and total pages printed on the current drum. This mode clears these counters.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <7>.
2. Press [Yes]. The counters will be reset.

3.19 Clear Optional Data

This mode clears all data and all activity journals for Printer controller.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <8>.
2. Press [Yes]. The optional data will be reset.

3-136
3.20 Set Service Code

This is the code to protect the life monitor clear operation. If it is not necessary to protect to the life
monitor clear operation, abort this operation without entering the service code.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <9>.
2. Your next mode depends on whether youre creating or modifying the service code:
If creating --- Go to step 3.
If modifying --- Use the numeric keypad to enter the proper service code and press [Enter]. If
you enter an invalid code, the fax will reject the attempt and abort this operation.
3. Use the numeric keypad to enter the four-digit service code.
4. Press [Enter].
Note: To turn off the service code and return to normal life monitor clear (not protected), change the
code to 0000 by repeating steps 1-4 and entering 0000 in step 3.
3-137
3.21 Life monitor maintenance

When you replace the main control PCB, you should register the previous several counter values of
the life monitor.
1. Before updating the software or replacing the main control PCB, write down the counter values of
the life monitor.
2. To confirm the life monitor, press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, <Enter>. Then scroll down the list. (See
3.11.1 Life Monitor, page 3-118.)
3. After you write down the counter values of the life monitor, update the software or replace the main
control PCB.
4. Then, press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <0>.
5. Select [# Pages after toner replace] and press [Enter].
6. Enter previous values of the printed pages using the current toner cartridge, then press [Enter].
7. Select [# Page after toner warning] and press [Enter].
8. Enter previous value of the printed pages after the toner warning is displayed, then press [Enter].
9. Select [Drum Life Time] and press [Enter].
10. Enter previous value of the drum life, then press [Enter].
11. Select [Drum Life], and press [Enter].
12. Enter previous value of the drum life, then press [Enter].
13. Select [Drum Replaced #], and press [Enter].
3-138
13. Enter previous value of the drum replaced count, and press [Enter].
14. Select [Toner Replaced #], and press [Enter].
15. Enter previous value of the toner replaced count, then press [Enter].
16. Select [Fuser Replaced Count], and press [Enter].
17. Enter previous value of the fuser replaced count, then press [Enter].
18. Select [Fuser Life], and press [Enter].
19. Enter previous value of the fuser life, then press [Enter].
20. Select [Transfer Rplcd Count], and press [Enter].
21. Enter previous value of the transfer roller replaced count, then press [Enter].
22. Select [Transfer Life], and press [Enter].
23 Enter previous value of the transfer roller life, then press [Enter].
24. Press <Reset> to go to the standby screen.
3-139
3.22 Sensor input test

This mode can confirm the sensor status. When the sensor operates, the value next to sensor name
changes 0 to 1. For example, when open the 1st paper cassette, the CAS1:0 change to CAS1: 1.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <2>.
1. Press <> or <> to display the dsired sensor.

Code
Status
Code
DS1
0: No document
DS2
1: Document existing
DRS
Sensor for resist
DW1
0: No document
DW2
DL1
APS
Document Length Sensor for TXIL

ADF
0: No document
0: Platen cover is open
BIS
1: Platen cover is closed
HS
(Home Sensor)
0: Mirror is other than the

BSS
home position
1: Mirror in the home position
PSS
0: No paper
1: Detect paper
PDS
SWBK
Switchback sensor
0: Off (No paper there)
1: On (Paper there)
Second cassette feed sensor
0: No
1: Yes
Third cassette feed sensor
0: No
1: Yes
Fuse (Drum sensor)
0: Burned (Used drum)
1: Not burned
Cartridge sensor
0: No cartridge
1: Cardtridge
Power unit fan lock
0: Turning
1: Locked
Main motor lock
0: Turning
1: Locked
Shows the humidity outside
the machine
Vcont value of toner
DUP
FEED2
FEED4
DSW1
CART
LOCK_P
LOCK1M
HYDRO
VCON
FEED3
DUPU
DEV
LOCK_F
LOCK2M
THRM
ATDC
3-140
Status
0: No document
Document width detection
DW1
DW2
Width
0
0
Minimun
1
0
A4
0
1
A3
1
1
B4
0: Scanner cover is close
1: Scanner cover is open
Start scanning the document
on FBS
0: On
1: Off
Document Length Sensor for
FBS
0: No document
Paper sensor for exit area
0: No paper
1: Detect paper
Duplex sensor
0: Off (No paper there)
1: On (Paper there)
Third cassette feed sensor
0: No
1: Yes
Duplex unit detection
0: No duplex unit
1: Duplex unit
Developing unit detection

0: No unit
1: Developing unit
Fusing unit fan lock
0: Turning
1: Locked
Second motor lock
0: Turning
1: Locked
Shows the temperature
outside the machine
Shows the ATDC value of
the sensor
Code
TOS
PES
J1_OP
PSIZE2
PES3
J3_OP
PES4
J4_OP
PSIZEM
LFTUP1
LFETUP3
LEFTUP4
Status
Toner in toner buffer
0: Yes
1: No
Paper Empty Sensor
0: Detect paper is 1st
cassette
1: No paper in 1st cassette
1st cassette side cover
0: Closed
1: Open
Paper size for 2nd cassette
1:A5R 2:A5 3:OTHER
4:A4 5:F4 6:A3
8:B5R 9:B5 A:B4 C:A4R
0: Detect paper is 3rd
cassette
0: No paper in 3rd cassette
3rd cassette side cover
0: Closed
1: Open
0: Detect paper is 4th cassette
1: No paper in 4th cassette
Code
TEMP
Status
Show the internal
temperature of heat roller.
PSIZE
Paper size for 1st cassette

1:A5R 2:A5 3:OTHER
4:A4 5:F4 6:A3
8:B5R 9:B5 A:B4 C:A4R
0: Detect paper is 2nd
cassette
1: No paper in 2nd cassette
2nd cassette side cover
0: Closed
1: Open
PES2
J2_OP
PSIZE3
Paper size for 3rd cassette

1:A5R 2:A5 3:OTHER
4:A4 5:F4 6:A3
8:B5R 9:B5 A:B4 C:A4R
PSIZE4
Paper size for 3rd cassette

1:A5R 2:A5 3:OTHER
4:A4 5:F4 6:A3
8:B5R 9:B5 A:B4 C:A4R
0: Detect paper on bypass
tray
1: No paper on bypass tray
Front cover
0: Closed
1: Open
4th cassette side cover

PES_BS
0: Closed
1: Open
Paper size for bypass tray
FR_OP
0:A4R 1:A4 2:B5R 3:B5 4:A5R
5:A5
6:OTHER
7:POSTCARD 8:A3 9:B4
1st cassette liftup sensor
LFTUP2
0: No
1: Yes
3rd cassette liftup sensor
0: No
1: Yes
4th cassette liftup sensor
0: No
1: Yes
2nd cassette liftup sensor

0: No
1: Yes
3. Press [Close]
to return to standby mode.

Note: CAS2, JAM2 and PES2 do not change, when there is no second cassette attached.
SWBK does not change, when the machine has no duplex printing unit.
3-141
3.23 Printer diagnostic mode

This mode can confirm the operation of each parts of the printer section.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <3>.
2. Press <> or <> to select the device you want to set to ON.
Fan
:Turns the cooling fan motor
Rx Motor :Turns the Rx motor

Lamp
:Turns the lamp on
Clutch 1 :Turns the clutch of 1st cassette

Clutch 2 :Turns the clutch of 2nd cassette
Clutch 3 :Turns the clutch of 3rd cassette
Clutch 4
:Turns the clutch of 4th cassette
R Clutch :Turns the clutch of the resist roller

Clutch M :Turns the clutch of the bypass tray
Dup Clutch :Turns the duplex clutch
ALL OFF :Turns the all device to off
3. Press [Enter].
4. Press [Enter] again to exit.
3.24 Network service mode

This mode provides the following four items:

Display the sum-check of internet fax board
Delete the Manager (Admisitrator)
All clear the registered parameters of the optional Internet fax board
3.24.1 Display the server sum-check

1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <4>.
2.
Select Show
Server Sumcheck and press [Enter].
3. Press [Close] to close the server sumcheck display.
3-142
3.24.2 Delete Manager

Clear the administrator information, when the administrator passward is missing and no one can
manage the network setting.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <4>.
2.
Select Delete Manager
and press [Enter].
3.
Press [Yes].
3.24.3 All clear the registered parameters of the network board

You can clear all the data of network settings like IP address, Subnet Mask or Default Gateway.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <4>.
2. Select Server data clear and press [Enter].
3. Press [Yes]. The information will be cleared.
3.25 Flash Rom Sum Check

This mode allows you to check Sum after the Flash ROM version is updated.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <2>, <9>.
2. Press [Close] to return to standby mode.
3-143
3.26 Printer registration adjustment

This mode can adjust the print registration for each paper source.
For more detail, see 5.3 Adjustment in section 5.
3.27 Set Service Report

3.27.1 Set the service report
If using this feature, you should be enter following items:
Report location 1 and 2 Where to send the service report. Location 1 is the muratec
customer service number.
Period The report can be send either once in a determined month(s) or once in a month on
a determined date and time.
1. Press <Menu>,
<*>, <4>, <2>.
2. Select Setting and press [Enter].

3. Select Send Service Report and press [Enter].
3. To activate the Service Report mode, select On and press [Enter].
4. Now you can enter the detail for the report.

Press Report Location 1 and press [Enter].
5. To send the service report to the customer service, select [On] and press [Enter].
6. Enter the fax number where to send the report. Press [Enter].
3-144
7. Press Report Location 2 to enter another location. Otherwise, skip to step 9.
8. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to enter the location.

9. Select Interval Months and press [Enter].
10. Enter the interval for service report auto transmission from 1 to 12 months and press [Enter].
11. Press <Reset> to go back to standby mode.
3.27.2 Clear service report

To clear the information of service report:
1. Press <Menu>,
<*>, <4>, <2>.

2. Select Delete and press [Enter].
3. To clear the information of service report setting, select yes and press [Enter].
To finish the operation without clearing, select No and press [Enter]
3-145
3.28 Reset Printer Trouble

This mode clears the service call.
Note: Perform this operation after solved the trouble.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <5>.
2. Press [Yes].
3.29 Cleaning mode

This mode rotate the feed roller and registration roller automatically so that you can clean the surface
of them.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <6>.
2. Press <Start>.
3. To rotate the feed roller, select Feed Roller ON and press [Enter].
4. Open the feeder cover and clean the feed roller.
To stop rotating the roller, select Feed Roller OFF and press [Enter].
5. To rotate the pickup roller, select Pickup Roller ON and press [Enter].
6. Clean the pickup roller. The pickup roller is able to clean without opening the feeder cover.
To stop rotating the roller, select Pickup Roller OFF and press [Enter].
3.30 Voice test

This mode makes it possible to hear all the voice guidance in order. You can adjust the volume in five
steps by pressing the cursor key ( or ).
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <7>.
2. The voice guidance comes from the speaker one after another.
3. Press <Reset> to go back to the standby mode.
3-146
3.31 Network Switch

When an e-mail address is registered as the archive destination, you can set the reroute function on
or off. (For this MFP, only this function is available in the network switch.)
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <5>, <1>.
2. Select Set Network Switch and press [Enter].
3. Press <0>, <0>, <7>, and then [Enter].
4. Move to the cursor to the right switch and change it either to 0 or 1 using the numeric key.
(0 is for Off. 1 is for On. The default setting is 0, OFF.)
5. Press [Enter] to save the setting.
3.32 Security function maintenance

The security function is available regardless of the registered protect passcode.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <5>, <2>.
2. Select the desired function and press [Enter].

3. Edit the function and press [Enter].
3.33 Measuring the black ratio

The black ratio of the scanned document can be measured. The maximum document size is A3 (600
dpi).
1. Set the document to measure.
2. Press <Menu>, <*>, <5>, <4>.
3. Press [Yes].
4. When the measure is finished, the black ratio will be displayed on the LCD.
3-147
3.34 Service function menu

All the field service program modes are available from the menu.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <7>, <7>.
2. Select the mode you want to enter and press [Enter].

See this chapter how to operate each service function.
3.35 Quick Initial settings

At installation of this machine, you should set some parameters according to the following procedures.
You can do the following setting with continuously.
1. Initial settings
2. Consumable order sheet settings
3. Service Report settings.
Note: Before starting the installation settings, clear the memory by pressing <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <2>,
[Enter].
Entering initial settings

1-1.
To start Initial setting mode, press <Menu>, <*>, <9>, <9>. The LCD shows:
1-2.
Select Language, and press [Enter]. The screen may differ according to the country.
1-3.
Select the desired language, and press [Enter].
1-4.
Select Current Time, and press [Enter]. The screen may differ according to the country.
1-5.
Enter the date and time using the cursor key and numeric keypad, and press [Enter].
1-6.
Select Daylight Saving, and press [Enter].
Note: This will appear only for European version.

1-7.
Select OFF or ON, and press [Enter].
When the setting is On, your machine automatically recognizes DST at 2 am on the appropriate
switch over Sundays each year.
When the setting is Off, no automatic change will occur.
1-8.
Select Comm. Line, and press [Enter].
Note: This will appear only for China and Japanese version.
3-148
1-9. Select the desired type of dialing needed for the fax machine either tone or pulse, then press
[Enter].
1-10.
Select Reception Mode, and press [Enter].
1-11.
Select the desired reception mode for the machine, then press [Enter].
1-15.
Select Dialtone Detect, and press [Enter].
1-16. Select OFF or ON, and press [Enter]. Usually select OFF. If you select ON, the machine needs
to detect the dial tone before calling.
If you select OFF, the machine does not need to detect the dial tone before calling.
1-17. Select TTI Enter/Edit, and press [Enter].
You can edit three TTIs.
1-18. Select 01, and press [Enter].
1-19. Enter the TTI by pressing the numeric keys, and press [Enter].
1-20. Repeat Step 1-18 and 1-19 and to enter TTI2 and TTI3 as needed.
1-21. Select Standard TTI.
1-22. Select the default TTI among the entered TTIs, and press [Enter].
1-23. Select TTI Number.
1-24. Enter the fax number that will be displayed on other fax machines displays or printouts. The fax
industry term for this number is Subscriber ID. Press [Enter] to save the setting.
1-25. When the OfficeBirdge option is installed, enter the Time zone using the cursor key and numeric
keypad.
[Time zones] refer to the difference in time (up to 12 hours) between countries from the
Greenwich Observatory in England, which is taken to be standard time, and to regions that use
the same difference.
1-26. Press [Close].
3-149
The LCD now shows the Consumable order sheet setting menu.
To set, clear or print the consumable order sheet, see "3-135 Consumable order sheet" how
to operate these functions.
To skip to the service report settings, press [Close]. See "3-147 Set Service Report" how to
operate the functions.
Press [Close] to go back to the standby screen.
3.36 Update the software

The software on the MFP are written on a flash ROM. Use a compact flash memory card (CF), to
update the software. The are two ways to update the software:
Automatic ROM update
Manual ROM update
3.36.1 Before updating the flash ROM

The MFP does not detect the CF memory card when you insert it while power on. A malfunction
may occur.
Turn the MFP to OFF before inserting the CF memory card, and then turn the MFP to on.
Do not pull out the CF memory card while overwriting, because the system may get unstable.
A CF memory card is not available for both automatic and manual update.
Both Boot folder and ROM folder can exist on one CF memory card, however either the boot or
the ROM folder can hold an update ROM file.
You can not update the MFP while it is in use or the memory is in use.
Be sure that the MFP is not in use, and the remaining memory is 100%, before updating the ROM.
*When you perform the automatic ROM update, be sure the power is charged enough.
Do not turn the power off during updating.
Doing this will not recover the machine. In case the machine is unable to recover, replace the main
control PCB.
3-150
3.36.2 Automatic ROM update

The MFP will update the ROM automaticary using the ROM date on the CF memory card.
To perform the ROM update the follwing conditions should all be filled:
One ROM data file is save on \Boot folder.
Model code of MFP ROM data *1 matches with Model code on the CF memory card *1.
Model name of the MFP ROM data matches with Model name on the CF memory card.
Distribution country of the MFP ROM data matches with Distribution country name on the CF
memory card.
ROM version of the MFP differs with ROM version on the CF memory card.
*1 : The model code for MFX-2700/MFX-2200 is DB2.
Operation
1. Power off the MFP.
2. Open the access cover, and insert the CF memory card to the main control PCB.
CF
3. Turn the MFP to on. The ROM update starts.

4. When the conditions are filled, the message bellow will be displayed on the LCD and the ROM data
on the CF memory card will be copied on the SDRAM. While the data copied, the ROM version and
the coping data volume will be displayed. (The transfering value displayed goes from 0 KB to the
data size on the ROM)
CF ROM Upgrade
MainBoardROM Ver. 2700 CHN A0A0A0 DB2
Receiving
4092KB
Do not remove CF card
(Sample)
5. When copy is finished, the update of flash ROM begins.
While updating the flash ROM, the panel LEDs will turned on in order. When the ROM update is
finished, the MFP reboots automatically.
6. When the MFP is rebooted check the ROM version.
Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, and select Life Monitor then [Enter].
8. Pull out the CF memory card. Close the access cover.
9. Turn on the MFP.
3-151
3.36.3 Manual ROM update

You can choose the ROM data on the CF memory card from Main control board or OP550.
To perform the ROM update the all the following conditions should be filled:
For main contorl board
One or more ROM data file is saved on \ROM\(model code)*1 folder.
Model code of MFP ROM data *1 matches with Model code on the CF memory card *1.
No ROM data with the same model code is saved on \Boot folder.
*1 : The model code for MFX-2700/MFX-2200 is DB2.
For PCL print (OP550) board
One or more ROM data file is saved on \ROM\OP500 folder.
Model name of the MFP ROM data matches with Model name on the CF memory card.
The ROM is able to overwrite with a new, old or same version ROM. The display shows to which
verwion the CF memory card is overwriting the MFP. however the MFP does not jedge the version.
Operation
2. Open the access cover, and insert the CF memory card to the main control PCB.
CF
3. Turn the MFP to on. The ROM update starts.

4. Be sure that the MFP is in standby mode and press <Menu>, <*>, <9>, <6>.
5. Select the PCB board to update and press [Enter].
6. If there are many ROM versions saved on the card, choose to which version to update, and press
[Enter].
3-152
7. Confirm the ROM version and press [Enter].

If the model code of the MFP ROM and the model code of the CF memory card matches the ROM
update starts.
CF ROM Upgrade
File name 2700__A0AA0.CHN
[Close]
[Enter]
8 When the copy is finished, Sum Check will be displayed.

CF ROM Upgrade
Sum Check
16BIT[N] : 41BD
[Close]
[Enter]
9 When you updating the ROM of the Main control board, press [Update] to start to update the flash
ROM.
While updating the flash ROM, the panel LEDs will turned on in order. When the ROM update is
finished, the MFP reboots automatically.
When you updating the ROM of the OP550, pressing [Update] will start to copy the ROM date from
the MFP SDRAM to PCL print board.
While the data copied, the ROM version and the coping data volume will be displayed. (The transferring value displayed goes from 0 KB to the data size on the ROM)
When the copy is over, the PCL print board updates the ROM.
When the ROM update is finished, the MFP reboots automatically.
10 When the MFP is rebooted check the ROM version.
Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, and select Life Monitor then [Enter].
11 Power off the MFP.
12 Pull out the CF memory card. Close the access cover.
13 Turn on the MFP.
Improtant: DO NOT power off the machine while updating. Doing this will not recover the machine. In
case the machine is unable to recover, replace the main control PCB.
When you try to perform ROM update while the SDRAM is in use (out-of-paper=reception etc.), the
following message will be displayed and the machine reboots without updating the ROM.
CF ROM Upgrade
Memory in use
3-153
3.36.4 How to save the ROM data on the CF memory card

For manual ROM update
Main control boad ROM

Create a folder "\ROM\(oder cord)", save the ROM data on that root directory.

One or more ROM data should be saved in the folder.

No "\Boot" folder should be saved in the root directory.
3-154
OP550 ROM

Create a folder "\ROM\OP500", save the ROM data on that root directory..

One or more ROM data should be saved in the folder.
3-155
For automatic ROM update

Create "\Boot" folder and save just one ROM data on that root directory.
3-156
4 Troubleshooting Procedures
4.1 Troubleshooting Outline
Before troubleshooting a unit check the following:
Is the power cord correctly connected to the machine?

Are the telephone handset and the telephone line cord connected correctly?
Is the telephone dial type set correctly?
Is there paper in the paper cassette?
Are the toner and drum cartridges set correctly?
Are all covers closed correctly?
Before removing any portions of the machine or making any adjustments be sure the
power cord is disconnected from the unit. Check the following:
The power source should be rated according to unit specifications.

The unit should not be connected to an electrical circuit with other equipment or where voltages may
vary.
The unit should be installed on a flat, level surface.

The ambient temperature and relative humidity surrounding the unit should be 10
C to 32C (50F to
89.6F) at
20% to
80% humidity
with no condensation.
The unit should be located in a well ventilate area.

The unit should receive necessary cleaning and maintenance.
The unit should be installed:
Away from heat sources and heating or cooling vents.
Away from water heaters, steam generators, humidifiers or other areas of high humidity.
Away from dusty areas.
Away from areas where chemical fumes or gasses are generated or may collect.
Away from areas exposed to direct sunlight.
Check the consumable:
Verify that the recording paper supply is adequate and that it conforms to the type specified for use
in the machine.
Verify that the recording paper has been stored away from moisture and damp areas.
Verify that the recording paper has not been damaged in any way.
4.2 Mirror Carriage Error

Symptom: The mirror carriage doesnt move.
Suggested corrective action:
1. Verify that the scanner unit locking pins have been released. Release the scanner unit locking pins
if they are not released. Then press <Menu>, <*>, <1>, <4> to turn off the mirror carriage carry
mode.
2. Verify that the timing belt is not out of joint.
3. Check the operation of HOME sensor at connector P148, on the PCB Scannser.
4-1
4.3 Recording Paper Jam

After removing the jammed paper, please close the top cover once.
Mechanical errors
Symptom
Possible cause
Countermeasure
Jam in the paper

supply area
The selected paper is not suitable.
Recommend customer to use suitable paper.
Wrinkled /bent /torn paper has been set in

the cassette.
Replace it with the new paper.
Paper is not loaded properly.
Reload the paper by using the paper guides properly.
* The cassette has not been installed into

the machine properly
* The side paper guides have not been slid
up against the edges of paper properly.
* The paper cassette setting is wrong.
Instruct the user how to set the paper settings properly.
Faulty movement of some cassette parts.
Check each movement of a cassette part.

Replace the faulty part.
Paper is stuck in the recording area.
Remove the stuck paper.
The paper feed roller is worn out.
Replace the roller.
Jam in the feed

area
Paper is stuck in the feed area.
Remove the jammed paper.
Jam in the fuser or

the paper exit area
Paper is stuck in the fuser or paper exit

area.
Remove the jammed paper.
The fuser roller is not clean.
Replace the fuser roller.
Electrical errors
Symptom
Jam in the feed
area
Please close the
blinking cover.
Possible cause
Countermeasure
The paper supply electromagnetic clutch

does not work..
* Check the wiring.

* Replace the paper supply electromagnetic clutch.
* Replace the PCB PRT.
* Replace the PCB Main.
The paper supply sensor (PSS) does not

work.
Check that the wiring and actuator are working properly. If

confirmed OK, then replace the PSS or PCB Main.
Jam in the feed

area
Please close the
blinking cover.
The malfunction of the PPS.

confirmed OK, then replace the PSS or PCB Main.
Jam in the feed

area
Check paper
size.....
The paper size is not correct.
Check that the paper, paper size settings, sensor, and wiring (including the operation.) Replace the PCB PRT.
Jam in the fuser or

paper exit area
The paper discharge sensor (PDS) does

not work.

confirmed OK, then replace the PDS or PCB Main.
4-2
4.4 Document Feeder Jam

ADF
Mechanical Errors
Symptom
While
feeding a
document
The ADF does not feed the

document.
Possible Cause
Countermeasure
The pickup roller is dirty or worn out.
Clean the roller.

Replace the roller.
The power of the separation roller

is getting decrease. The separation
pressure does not match the paper
source.
Adjust the separation pressure.

Clean the roller.
The motor is not rotating.
Replace the motor, or the PCB ADF.
While
The feeder stops the feeding
The malfunction of the sensor..
scanning a job while the document is taken
The motor power is not working
document into the feeder.
properly.
Replace the sensor.

Replace the motor or the PCB ADF.
The roller is dirty.
Replace the roller.
The roller is worn out.
Replace the roller.
The document is stuck and gets A foreign object entered the feed
damaged while taken into the
area.
feeder.
The paper quality is not acceptable.
The paper shape is not acceptable.
Remove the object.

Recommend the customer to use the
book scanner.
Sensor Malfunctions
Symptom
While
feeding a
document
No beep sound when you

place the paper.
(The beep sound volume setting could be OFF.)
Possible Cause
Countermeasure
DS1 defect
0) Press [Menu], [*], [2], [2] to display

the sensor job confirmation mode.
1) Confirm the LCD indication changes
by moving the DS1 sensor.
0: No document / 1: Document
2) If the does not change, replace the
DS1 sensor.
3) Replace the sensor harness.
4) Replace the PCB scanner.
APS sensor defect
0) Press [Menu], [*], [2], [2] to display

the sensor job confirmation mode.
1) Confirm that the LCD indication
changes by opening and closing the
book cover.
0: Cover Open / 1: Document
2) If the LCD indication does not
change, replace the APS sensor.
5) Replace the harness between the
PCB scanner and the PCB Main.
* The FBS does not work correctly while displaying the ADF sensor status.
Please do not open or close the FBS cover while displaying the ADF sensor status.
4-3
Symptom
While feeding The machine feeds the
a document
document through the ADF
without scanning.
The machine feeds the

document through the ADF
without scanning.
While scanning a document
Possible Cause
DRS sensor defect
0) Press [Menu], [*], [2], [2] to display the sensor job

confirmation mode.
1) Confirm that the LCD indication changes by opening
the ADF cover and pressing the filler.
0: No document /1: Document
2) If the display indication does not change, replace the
DRS sensor.
5) Replace the harness between the PCB scanner and
PCB Main.
DS2 defect

confirmation mode.
the ADF cover and inserting the document from
above.
0: No document /1: Document
2) If the LCD indication does not change, replace the
DRS sensor.
PCB Main.
DW1 or DW2 defect

confirmation mode.
1) Confirm that the LCD indication changes by moving
the document guides.
The scan starting and ending area are not correct.
The scanning size is not

correct.
Countermeasure
Document guide
A5
A4
B4
A3
DW1
0
1
1
0
DW2
0
0
1
1

DW1 or the DW2 sensor.
4) Replace the PCB ADF.
5) Replace the PCB Main.
the PCB Main.
While a docu- The LCD shows a warning
DS1 or DS2 sensor
ment exits
while a document exits after defect
scanning.
The LCD shows a warning
after a document exits.
4-4
Check [DS1 defect] first, then [DS2 defect].
Others
The message, Please

close the blinking cover.
does not appear on the
LCD.
TXIL sensor defect

confirmation mode.
and closing the ADF cover.
0: Cover Open / 1: Cover Close
TXIL sensor.
the the PCB Main.
The length of the docuDL1 sensor defect

ment has not been scanned
properly.

confirmation mode.
1) Confirm that the LCD indication changes by placing
B4 or A3 document on the hopper area.
DL1 sensor.
4) Replace the PCB ADF.
5) Replace the harness between the ADF and scanner.
PCB Main.
The blinking cover: The

ADF cover
4-5
FBS Scanner
Mecannical Errors
Symptom
An unusual noise occurs.
Possible Cause
Countermeasure
The belt has not been firmly inserted into

the belt holder.
Check the belt.
The FBS motor gear is interfering with the

film.
Check the interfering area
The motor actuation belt is getting too slack. Check the timing belt
Sensor Malfunctions
Symptom
While placing
a document
While scanning a document
The document
size can not
be scanned
properly.
Possible Cause
BIS sensor defect
0) Press [Menu], [*], [2], [2] to display the sensor job confirmation mode.
1) Confirm that the LCD indication changes by
opening and closing the book cover.
0: Cover Open / 1: Cover Close
2) If the LCD indication does not change,
replace the BIS sensor.
5) Replace the harness between the PCB
scanner and the PCB Main.
BSS sensor defect
placing A3 on the book scanner area.
replace the BSS sensor.
The lamp is
Lamp defect
not illuminated.
Lamp FPC defect
The mirror
carriage is
touching the
home side (on
the left toward
to the front)
Countermeasure
Replace it.
Replace it.
Lamp inverter defect
Replace it
Harness for inverter controller defect
Replace it.
PCB scanner defect
Replace it.
HS sensor defect
opening and closing the book cover.
0: Not home position (The cover has been
opened.)
1: Home position (The cover has been
closed.)
replace the HS sensor.
The mirror car- FBS motor defect

riage does not
PCB scanner defect
work.
Replace it.
Replace it.
4-6
4.5 LCD Failure

Symptom
1
The LCD shows

nothing.
What to confirm
Countermeasure
1. Is the power switch turned on?.
Yes
No
Check No.2.
Turn on the power switch.
2. Does the electrical outlet have access to

power?
Yes
No
Check No.3.
Check the power routing to the outlet.
3. Is the auto power off mode ON? (Is the

Energy Save Mode lamp illuminated?)
Yes
No
Press the Energy Save Mode button to

reset the mode.
Check No.4.
4. Has the power supply fuse blown out?
Yew
No
Check No.4.
Check No.5.
5. Do CN2-13 and 14 of the power supply

have +3.3V output?
Yes
No
Check No.6.
Replace the power supply.
6. Do P12-13 and 14 on the PCB Main have Yes

+3.3V output?
No
Check No.7
Check the harness between the power and
PCB Main.
7. Do P110-1 and 2 on the PCB PANEL A

have +3.3V?
Yes
No
Check No.8.
Check the harness between the power and
PCB Main.
8. If you replace the LCD, the symptom will

be fixed.
Yes
No
Replace the LCD.

Check No.9.
9. If you replace the PCB Panel A, the

symptom will be fixed.
Yes
No
Replace the PCB Panel A.

Check No.10.
10. If you replace the PCB Main, the symptom will be fixed.
Yes
No
Replace the PCB Main.

Replace the machine.
* If none of the solutions work, then replace the machine.
4-7
4.6 Machine malfunction

No.
1
Symptom
The LCD shows
Please close the
blinking cover.
What to confirm
Countermeasure
1. If you close the blinking cover, the symptom will be fixed.
Yes
No
Solved.
Check No.2.
2. Is the cover secured firmly by screws?
Yes
No
Check No.3.
Secure the cover properly.
No
Yes
Replace the INTERLOCK.

Check No.4.
2) Open the ADF cover.

If you press the TXIL, the PCB ADF
P1482-7 will change to +3V through GND.
No
Yes
Replace the TXIL.

Check No.5
3) Open the side cover 2 and 3.

If you press the J2COP, J3COP or J4COP,
the PCB cassette P4-1 will change to +3V
through GND.
Yes
No
Replace the J2COP, J3COP or J4COP.

Check No.6
4. If you replace the harness between the

PCB Main and the PCB PRT, the message will disappear.
Yes
No
Replace the harness.

Check No.8.

PCB ADF and the PCB SCAN, the message will disappear.
Yes
No

Check No.8.

PCB Main and the PCB casette, the message will disappear.
Yes
No

Check No.7.
7. If you replace the PCB cassette, the message will disappear.
Yes
No
Replace the PCB cassette.

Check No.8.
8. If you replace the PCB Main, the message

will disappear.
Yes
No
Replace the PCB Main

3.
1) Open the front cover or the side cover.
If you press INTERLOCK, the PCB PRT
P152-3 will change to +24V through GND.
* If none of the solutions work, then replace the machine.
4-8
No.
Symptom
Documents jam
frequently.
The LCD shows
Please reset the
document.
What to confirm
Countermeasure
1. Did you feed a single document?
Yes
No
Check No. 2.
Check No. 3
2. Did you use thin paper or converted

paper?
Yes
No
Recommend the customer to use a book scanner.

Check No. 8.
3. Did you set documents more than the

capacity?
Yes
No
Check No. 4.
Check No. 5.
4. If you set documents within the capacity,

the symptom be fixed.
Yes
No
Solved.
Check No. 5.
5. Did you use wrinkled or curled documents?
Yes
No
Recommend the customer to use a book scanner.

Check No. 6.
6. Does the machine still feed documents?
Yes
No
Check No. 7.
Check No. 8.
7. Does the machine still discharge documents?
Yes
No
Check No. 23.

Check No. 24.
8. Does the clutch rotate properly?
Yes
No
Check No. 9.
Check the clutch condition.
9. Does the separate roller work properly?
Yes
No
Check No. 11.

Check No. 9.
10. Does the transfer gear work properly?
Yes
No
Check No. 10.

Adjust the gear.
11. Does the ADF motor rotate properly?
Yes
No
Check No. 12.

Replace the ADF motor.
12.Is the separation pressure appropriate?
Yes
No
Check No. 18.

Adjust the separation pressure.
13. Do CN2-3, 4, 5 and 6 of the power

supply have +24V output?
Yes
No
Check No. 13.


power supply and the PCB Main, the
message will disappear.
Yes
No
Replace the harness between the power supply

and PCB Main.
Check No. 15.
15. Do P12-3, 4 and 5, and P6-1 on the

PCB Main have +24V output ?
Yes
No
Check No. 16.

16. Has the DS1 sensor been installed

properly?
Yes
No
Check No. 17.

Re-install it properly.
17. Does the feeler for the DS1 sensor

work properly?
Yes
No
Check No. 18.

Replace the DS1 sensor.
18. Does the feeler for the DS2 sensor

work properly?
Yes
No
Check No. 19.

Replace the DS2 sensor.
19. Are there any foreign objects stuck

around paper guides?
Yes
No
Remove the objects.

Check No. 20.
20. Does the voltage level of P1487-1 on the

PCB ADF change to +0V when the DS1 is
ON, and to +5V when the DS1 is OFF?
Yes
No
Check No. 22.

Check No. 21.
21. If you replace the DS1 sensor, the

Yes
No
Replace the DS1.

22. Does the voltage level of P1486-1 on the

PCB ADF change to +0V when the DS2 is
ON, and to +5V when the DS2 is OFF?
Yes
No
Check No. 23.

Check No. 24.
23. If you replace the DS2 sensor, the

Yes
No
Replace the DS2.

24. Is the separation roller dirty?
Yes
No
Replace the separation roller.

Check No. 25.
25. Is the pad separator dirty?
Yes
No
Replace the pad separator.

4-9
No.
3
Symptom
What to confirm
Countermeasure
Complete mark is 1. Is the stamp setting ON?

not stamped.
Yes
No
Check No. 2.
Turn it ON.
2. Does the stamp has ink?
Yes
No
Check No. 3.
Replace the ink pad.
3. If you replace the solenoid, the symptom

will be fixed.
Yes
No
Replace the solenoid.

Check No. 4.
4. Do CN2-3,4,5 and 6 of the power supply

have +24V output?
Yes
No
Check No. 5.
5. Does P1484-1 on the PCB ADF have

+24V output?
Yes
No
Check No. 7.
Check No. 6.

power supply and the PCB Main, the
Yes
No

Check No. 7.
Yes
No

1. Have the document guides been

adjusted properly?
Yes
No
Check No. 2.
Re-adjust the guides properly.
2. Did you place different size documents at

the same time?
Yes
No
Set only the same size documents.

Check No. 3.
3. Are there any foreign objects on the

paper pass?
Yes
No
Remove the objects.

Check No. 4.
4. Have the separator roller and the pad

separator been worn out?
Yes
No
Replace them.
Check No. 5.
5. A
re there any problems with on the
installations and operations of the separator roller and the pad separator?
Yes
No
Check their operations.

Check No. 6.
6. Is the outer guide A deformed?
Yes
No
Fix or replace it.

1. Are they thin documents?
Yes
No
Recommend customer to use the book

scanner.
Check No. 2.
2. Are there any foreign objects on the

document tray?
Yes
No
Remove the objects.

Check No. 3.
3. Do the documents get wrinkled or torn

around the feeding entry area?
Yes
No
Check No. 5.
Check No. 7.
4. Has the entry area of the outer guide A

been deformed?
Yes
No
Repair or replace it.

Check No. 7.
5. Is the roller separator dirty.
Yes
No
Replace the roller.

Documents skew
Documents get
wrinkled or torn
frequently.
4-10
No.
6
Symptom
The warning message Lamp error.
Call for service.
appears.
What to confirm
Countermeasure
1. Are there any foreign objects (including

documents) on the document glass?
Yes
No
Remove the objects.

Check No. 2.
2. Has the lamp been illuminated?
Yes
No
Check No. 3.
Check No. 14.
3. Has the sheet document press been

properly attached to the back side of the
platen cover?
Yes
No
Check No. 4.
Re-attach the sheet document press.
4. Is the sheet document press dirty?
Yes
No
Clean the sheet document press.

Check No. 5.
5. Are the contact glass and the document

glass dirty?
Yes
No
Clean the glasses.

Check No. 6.
6. Is the mirror dirty?
Yes
No
Clean the mirror.

Check No. 7.
7. Has the CCD harness come off?
Yes
No
Connect the harness.

Check No. 8.
8. Is the home sensor getting loose?
Yes
No
Check the sensor.

Check No. 9.
9. If you replace the home sensor, the

Yes
No
Replace the sensor.

Check No. 10.
10. Has the mirror carriage drive belt been

secured properly?
Yes
No
Secure the belt properly.

The message Paper 1. Did you load paper in the cassette

supply empty.
properly?
appears.
2. Is there electrical continuity in the harness between the PES sensor and the
PCB PRT?
Yes
No
Check No.2.
Re-load paper.
Yes
No
Check No. 3.
Replace the harness between the PES
sensor and the PCB PRT.
3. Is there electrical continuity in the harness between the PCB Main and the
PCB PRT?
Yes
No
Replace the harness between the PCB

Main and the PCB cassette.
Check No. 4.
4. If you replace the PES sensor, the message will disappear.
Yes
No
Replace the PES sensor.

Check No. 5.
5. If you replace the PCB PRT, the message

will disappear.
Yes
No
Replace the PCB PRT.

Checak No. 6.
6. If you replace the PCB Main, the message will disappear.
Yes
No

1. Is there any paper jam on the paper

pass?
Yes
No
Remove the paper.

Check No. 2.
2. Is there electrical continuity in the harness between the PRS sensor and the
PCB PRT?
Yes
No
Check No. 3, and the PRS sensor.

Replace the PSS sensor or the PCB PRT.
3. Is there electrical continuity in the harness between the PDS sensor and the
PCB Main?
Yes
No
Replace the harness between the PDS

sensor and the PCB Main.
4. If you replace the PRS sensor or the PDS

sensor, the message will disappear.
Yes
No
Replace the PRS sensor or the PDS sensor.

Check No. 5.
5. If you replace the PCB PRT, the message

will disappear.
Yes
No
Replace the PCB PRT.

Check No. 6.
6. If you replace the PCB Main, the message will disappear.
Yes
No

Paper jams or the

message Open the
blinking cover and
check...... appears.
4-11
No.
9
10
11
12
13
Symptom
Documents skew
When using the

auto feeder, the
reception image
expanded.
When using the

auto feeder, the
reception image
compressed.
The printouts are

too light.
Clock malfunction
What to confirm
Countermeasure
1. If you re-load the document and make

more than 10 copies, a document skew still
occurs.
Yes
No
Check No. 2.
Solved
2. Has the paper cassette been installed

properly?
Yes
No
Check No. 3.
Re-install it properly.
3. Does the cassette have any malfunctions?
Yes
No
Replace the casette.

1. If you print Checkered Pattern, the image

will expands more vertically than horizontally.
Note: The following causes are also possible. The sender sent the document
data using unsuitable documents like
excessively thick paper, no carbon
paper, rear carbon paper, and so on.
Yes
No
Check No. 2.
The senders problem.
(It might be caused by using unsuitable documents, or sender transmission
problems.)
2. Is the drawing force of the feed roller B and

the heat roller correct?
Yes
No
Check No. 3.
Clean the feed roller B.
Replace the feed roller B and the fuser.
3. If you replace the PCB Main, the symptom

will be fixed.
Yes
No
Solved.
1. If you print Checkered Pattern, the image

is more compressed vertically than horizontally.
Yes
No
Check No. 2.
(It might be caused by sender transmission problems.)
2. If you replace the feed roller B and the

fuser, the symptom will be fixed.
Yes
No
Solved.
Check No. 3.

will be fixed.
Yes
No
Solved.
1. Are copied and test print images too light,

or uneven density?
Note: The following causes are also possible. The contrast setting might be
not appropriate. Contrast irregularities are likely on printouts of documents containing thin lines or small
blue lettering.
Yes
No
Check No. 2.
(Possible causes are inappropriate contrast setting, using colored documents,
poor line connection, using unsuitable
documents, or sender transmission
problems.)
2. If you replace the toner or the drum cartridge, the symptom will be fixed.
Yes
No
Replace the toner or the drum cartridge.

Refer to the Image Quality Problems.
1. Are there any errors in the clock setting

process?
Yes
No
Follow the instruction manual.

Check No. 2.
2. Is it possible to reset the clock?
Yes
No
Check No. 3.

will be fixed.
Yes
No

4-12
No. Symptom
What to confirm
14
1. Is an error message displayed on the LCD?
Yes
No
Press [Reset] to delete the LCD message.

Check No. 2.
2. Has the phone line been connected?
Yes
No
Check No. 3.
Disconnect the line, then press the transmission switch.
3. Are you printing the check messages during fax transmission?
Yes
No
Restart the transmission after printing the

check messages.
Check No. 4.
4. If you replace the PCB panel A, the symptom will be fixed.
Yes
No
Replace the PCB panel A.

Check No. 5.

PCB panel A and the PCB Main, the symptom will be fixed.
Yes
No

panel A and the PCB Main.
Check No. 6.

will be fixed.
Yes
No

Yes
No
Check No. 2.
Check No. 3.
Yes
No
Stop using the password verification, then

check No. 3.
Match with the password
3. Have the machine parameter output and

the memory switch equalizer been set
properly?
Yes
No
Check No. 4.
Adjust the settings properly.
4. If you replace the PCB NCU, the symptom

will be fixed.
Yes
No
Replace the PCB NCU.

Check No. 5.
5.If you replace the harness between the

PCB NCU and the PCB Main, the symptom
will be fixed.
Yes

NCU and the PCB Main.
Check No. 6.

Yes
No

Check No. 7.
Yes
No

Check No. 8.

will be fixed.
Yes
No

1. Has the auto memory receive lamp been

illuminated?
Yes
No
Check No. 2.
Press auto memory reception key to illuminate the lamp.

will be fixed.
Yes
No

Check No. 3.

will be fixed.
Yes

NCU and the PCB Main.
Check No. 4.
15
16
The LCD does not

show the message
for receiving or
sending a FAX.
Countermeasure
The machine does 1. Is the machine verifying the password?

not receive or send
a FAX.
2. Is the password correct?
The auto memory

reception does not
work.
No
No
4. If you replace the harness between PCB
panel A and the PCB Main, the symptom
will be fixed.
Yes
No

Check No. 5.
Yes
No

Check No. 6.

will be fixed.
Yes
No

4-13
No.
17
18
19
Symptom
What to confirm
Countermeasure
A dial signal output 1. Has the line type setting been set correctly
fails after entering ?
the number from
the numeric keys.
will be fixed.
The transmission
monitor does not
work.
An unusual sound
occurs.
Yes
No
Check No. 2.
Set the correct line type.
Yes
No

Check No. 3.

PCB NCU and the PCB Main, the symptom
will be fixed.
Yes
No

Check No. 4.

Yes
No

Check No. 5.
Yes
No

Check No. 6.

will be fixed.
Yes
No

1. Has the volume setting been set to OFF?
Yes
No
Set the volume except OFF.

Check No. 2.
2. Has the setting for the transmission monitor been set up?
Yes
No
Check No. 3.
Set up the setting.
3. If you replace the speaker, the symptom

will be fixed.
Yes
No
Replace the speaker.

Check No. 4.

PCB HVPS and the PCB Main.
Yes
No

Check No. 5.
5. If you replace the PCB HVPS (High Voltage

Power Supply), the symptom will be fixed.
Yes
No
Replace the PCB HVPS.

Check No. 6.

will be fixed.
Yes
No

1. Are there any foreign objects around the

gear or clutch?
Yes
No
Remove the objects.

Check No. 2.
2. Does the sound occur during the transmission?
Yes
No
Check No. 3.
Check No. 7.
3. Are there any objects interfering with the

belt?
Yes
No
Remove the objects.

Check No. 4.
4. Are there any objects interfering with the

roller or the roller pole?
Yes
No
Remove the objects.

Check No. 5.
5. Has the motor (FBS) sounded abnormal?
Yes
No
Check No. 6.
Check No. 7.
6. Is the roller dirty?
Yes
No
Clean the roller.

Check No. 7.
7. Does the sound occur while recording?
Yes
No
Check No. 8.
Check No. 9.
8. If you replace the drum or toner cartridge,

the symptom will be fixed.
Yes
No
Replace either cartridge or both.

Check No. 9.
9. If you replace the transcriptional roller or

the fusing unit, the symptom will be fixed.
Yes
No
Replace the transcriptional roller or the

fusing unit.
Check No. 10.
10. Does the fan rotate smoothly?
Yes
No
Check No. 11.

Replace the parts.
Yes
No

4-14
No.
20
21
Symptom
What to confirm
Countermeasure
The document
1. Is the memory backed up with the following
memory can not be
procedure?
backed up.
1) During transmission
First disconnect the phone line, then send
the data. Next, turn the machine off while
waiting for re-dial. When you turn the
machine on again, the document memory
should remain.
Yes
No
No problem.
Check No. 2.
2) During reception
Initiate out of memory reception without
the document, then turn the machine off.
When you turn the machine on again, the
document memory should remain.
Yes
No
Put a jumper pin on JP2 of the PCB Main

to back up.
Check No. 2.
2. Has the battery been set to the PCB voice?
Yes
No
Check No. 4.
Check No. 5.
3. Have the PCB voice and the battery been

connected to P2?
Yes
No
4. Has the PCB voice been connected to the

PCB Main?
Yes
No
5. Is the voltage between the GND and the

PCB Main P12, 13 and 14 within the correct range? (+3.57V through +3.13V)
Yes
No
6. Is the battery voltage within the possible

value (above 2.2V) to be backed up?
Yes
No
7. Did you charge the battery for more than

72 hours?
Yes
No
Check No. 6.
Charge the battery.
8. If you replace the power supply, the symptom will be fixed.
Yes
No

Check No. 7.

will be fixed.
Yes
No
Replace the symptom.

Yes
No
Problem solved.
Check No. 2.
Yes
No
Check No. 3.
Check No. 4.
3. Is the OfficeBrdige board or the Network

interface board correctly connected to the
Main PCB?
Yes
No
Check No. 4.
Replace the OfficeBrdige board or the
Network interface board.
4. Is the printer control board equipped to the

machine?
Yes
No
Check No. 5.
Check No. 6.
5. Is the printer control board correctly connected to the Main PCB?
Yes
No
Check No. 6.
Replace the printer control board or the
Joint PCB.
6. Is the NCU PCB correctly connected to the

Main PCB?
Yes
No
Check No. 7.
Replace the NCU PCB.

will be fixed.
Yes
No
Replace the Main PCB.

The message
1. Turn off the machine and wait for more than
System stabilizathree minutes. Turn the machine on. Does
tion is needed. Turn
the message disappear?
power off and on.
is displayed on the 2. Is the OfficeBrdige board or the Network
interface board equipped to the machine?
LCD.
4-15
Check No. 6.
Check No. 5
4.7 The Image Quality Problems

If any image failure has occurred, first make the initial checks (refer to page 4-1), then proceed to the
corresponding image failure troubleshooting procedure.
Check the parameters for image quality adjustments and see if the problems solves.
Adjust the background level and see if the problem solves. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9> and select
[Background level, and press [Enter] then [Yes].)
Determine if the failure is attributable to the input system (Image Reading Section) or the output system
(Engine section):
1. Make copy full size copy of a document.
(Original)
(Copy)
2. Make a reductioncopy of the document.
(Original)
(Copy) - Input system cause
(Original)
(Copy) - Output system cause
4-16
4.7.1 Blank Copy or black copy

Typical Fault Image:

Blank copy:
Section
Scanner
Black copy:
Section
Scanner

Step Check Item
Result Action
1 Is the Scanner drive transmisNO
Check and change as necession mechanism in good condisary.
tion?
2 Do the connections from CCD
NO
Reconnect.
PCB Scanner PCB Main
YES Change PCB Scanner, PCB
PCB LPH LED unit reMain, PCB LPH in that order.
main intact?
Step Check Item

1 Does the Exposure Lamp turn
ON when make a copy with
open the platen cover?
2
4
5
Does the voltage across P14

on pin 2 and pin 3 change from
DC0V to DC24V when step 1
is performed again?
Does the voltage across P14
on pin 1 and pin 3 change
to DC0V when step 1 is performed again?
Are the mirrors and lens installed properly?
Are the mirrors and lens dirty?
4-17
Result Action
YES Perform steps 4 and onward.
NO
NO
Check connectors and harnesses and perform steps 2

and 3.
Change PCB Scanner.
YES
Change Inverter or exposure

lamp, in that order.
NO
Change PCB Main.
NO
Install them properly.
YES
Clean or change.
Blank copy and black copy:

Section
Drum cartridge
LED unit
Step Check Item

1 Developing Unit is driven properly.
2 Developing bias contact terminal, glide bias, sealed ground
or come electrode is dirty or
deformed.
3 Is the LED unit (lever B3) set
properly?
Result Action
NO
Correct or change drive coupling mechanism.
YES Clean or change the drum cartridge.
NO
Install it properly.
PCBs
LED unit and PCB LPH connected properly?
NO
Correct.
Transfer
Image transfer current contact

terminal is dirty or deformed.
YES
Clean or change the terminal.
Is the trouble settled with

above steps?
NO
Change drum cartridge.

Change LED unit.
Change High Voltage Power Supply.
Change PCB LPH.
Change PCB PRT.
Change PCB Main.
4-18
4.7.2 Low Image Density or rough image


Section
Scanner
Step Check Item

1 Image transfer current contact
PCB LPH LED unit remain intact?
3 Are the press document plate
and contact glass dirty?
4
Section
LED
Are you copying a thick volume

while trying to close the platen
cover trying to close?
Step Check Item

properly?
Result Action
NO
Check and change as necessary.
NO
Reconnect.
YES
YES
YES
Change PCB Scanner, PCB

Main, PCB LPH in that order.
Clean each parts and set the
background level again.
Copy with opened platen cover.
Result Action
NO
Install properly.
Transfer
Image transfer current contact

YES
Clean or change the terminal.
Drum cartridge
YES
Clean or change the drum cartridge.
Developing bias contact terminal, glid bias, sealed ground

deformed.
above steps?
NO

Change transfer roller.
Change LED unit.
Change PCB LPH.
Change PCB PRT.
Change PCB Main.
4-19
4.7.3 Foggy background


Section
Scanner
Section
Drum cartridge
part
Step Check Item

Result Action
1 Sunlight or any other extraneYES Protect the copier from exous light enters the copier.
trane-ous light.
1 Are the press document plate
YES Clean each parts and set the
and contact glass dirty?
back-ground level again.
2 Are you copying a thick volume YES Copy with opened platen covwhile trying to close the platen
er.
cover trying to close?
3 Are the mirrors and lens dirty?
YES Clean or change.
4 Is the Exposure Lamp dirty or
deteriorated?
5 Do the connections between
NO
Reconnect.
the Exposure Lamp and INVERTER remain intact?
6 Do the connections from INNO
Reconnect.
VERTER to PCB Scanner remain intact?
7 Do the connections from PCB
NO
Reconnect.
Scanner to PCB Main remain
in-tact?
8 Do the connections from PCB
NO
Reconnect.
Main to High Voltage Unit remain intact?
Step Check Item

1 Sunlight or any other extraneous light enters the copier.
2 PC Drum is dirty.
Result Action
YES Protect the copier from extraneous light.
YES Change the drum cartridge.
Comb Electrode contact terminal is dirty or deformed.
YES
Grid voltage contact terminal is

dirty or deformed.
Erase Lamp is dirty.
YES

Clean.
Erase Lamp is conducting.

above steps?
NO
NO
Erase lamp
6
7
4-20
YES
Change.
Change LED unit.
Change PCB PRT.
Change PCB Main.
4.7.4 Black Lines / White Lines

Black lines:
Section
Scanner
Step Check Item

1 Are the mirrors, lens, contact
glass or document glass dirty
with foreign matter?
Result Action
YES Clean.
Step
1
2
3
Result
YES
YES
YES
NO
YES
Reconnect.
Black lines :
Section
Paper path
Drum cartridge
Fuser
-
Check Item
Paper path is dirty with toner.
OPC Drum is dirty
Fusing rollers are dirty or
scratchy.
above steps?
NO
Action
Clean
Change the drum cartridge.
Change the fuser.
Change PCB LPH
Change PCB PRT.
Change PCB Main.
White lines:
Section
Scanner
Step Check Item

1 Are the contact glass or document glass dirty with foreign
matter?
Result Action
YES Clean.
NO
YES
Reconnect.
White lines :
Section
Transfer roller
Drum cartridge
Fuser
LED
Step Check Item

Result Action
1 Image Transfer Roller is dented YES Change the transfer roller.
or scratchy.
2 OPC Drum is dirty.
YES Change the fuser.
3 Fusing rollers are dirty or
scratchy.
4 LED is dirty.
YES Clean.
NO
Install properly.
properly?
6 Is the trouble settled with
NO
Change the drum cartridge.
above steps?
Change PCB LPH.
Change PCB PRT.
Change PCB Main.
4-21
4.7.5 Black Spots


Section
Scanner
Section
Paper pass
Step Check Item

Result Action
YES Clean.
Step Check Item

1 Paper pass is dirty with toner.
Result Action
YES Clean.
Fuser
Drum cartridge
part
YES
NO

Reconnect.
Fuser rollers are dirty or

scratchy.
OPC Drum is dirty.
YES
Change the fuser.
YES
Comb Electrode contact terminal is dirty or deformed.
YES
Clean or change drum cartridge.
Grid voltage contact terminal is

dirty or deformed.
Erase Lamp is dirty.
YES
Clean or change drum cartridge.

Clean.
Erase Lamp is conducting.

above steps?
NO
NO
Erase lamp
7
8
4-22
YES
Change.
Change the transfer roller.
Change PCB PRT.
Change PCB Main.
4.7.6 Void areas


Section
Scanner
Section
Drum cartridge
Step Check Item

Result Action
YES Clean.
Step Check Item

1 OPC Drum is dirty.
Result Action
YES Change drum cartridge.
Transfer roller
Fuser
Image Transfer Roller is dented

or scratchy.
Fuser rollers are dirty or
scratchy.
above steps?
4-23
YES
NO

Reconnect.
YES
YES
Change the fuser.
NO

Change PCB PRT.
Change PCB Main.
4.7.7 Smear on back


Section
Paper path
Transfer roller
Fuser
-
Step Check Item

Result Action
1 Paper path is dirty with toner.
YES Clean
or scratchy.
YES Change the fuser.
scratchy.
NO
above steps?
Change PCB PRT.
Change PCB Main.
4-24
4.7.8 Uneven image density

Section
Scanner
Step Check Item

Result Action
2 Is the Shading Sheet under the YES Clean or change.
Size cover dirty?
3 Is the Exposure Lamp dirty or
deteriorated?
NO
Reconnect.
YES Change PCB Scanner, PCB
PCB LPH LED unit reMain, PCB LPH in that order.
main intact?
Section
Transfer roller
Step Check Item

Result Action
or scratchy.
2 Developing unit is driven propNO
Correct or change drive couerly?
pling mechanism.
3 Developing bias contact termiYES Clean or change the drum carnal, glide bias, sealed ground
tridge.
deformed.
NO
above steps?
Change PCB PRT.
Change PCB Main.
Drum cartridge
4-25
4.7.9 Gradation Reproduction Failure

Section
Scanner
Step Check Item

Result Action
1 Is the Shading Sheet under the YES Clean or change.
Size cover dirty?
2
3
Section
Transfer roller
Drum cartridge
Are the contact glass or document glass dirty with foreign

matter?
Do the connections from CCD
YES
Clean or change.
NO
YES
Reconnect.
Step Check Item

Result Action
or scratchy.
2 Developing unit is driven propNO
Correct or change drive couerly?
pling mechanism.
3 Developing bias contact termiYES Clean or change the drum carnal, glide bias, sealed ground
tridge.
deformed.
NO
above steps?
Change PCB LPH.
Change PCB PRT.
Change PCB Main.
4-26
4.7.10 Periodically Uneven Image

4040F4C500DA
Section
Scanner
Step Check Item

Result Action
1 Is the FBS Motor drive gear
cracked or dirty with foreign
matter?
2 Is the Scanner Motor secured
NO
Secure properly.
properly?
3 Are the FBS belts attached
YES Adjust the belt tension.
loose?
4 Is the Mirror carriage secured
NO
Secure properly.
properly?
5 Are the Mirror carriage drive
NO
Wind the belts properly.
belts wound properly?
6 Are the Scanner rails damaged YES Clean or change.
or dirty with foreign matter?
NO
Reconnect.
PCB LPH LED unit reYES Change PCB Scanner, PCB
main intact?
Section
Drum cartridge
Step Check Item

Result Action
1 Developing unit is driving propNO
Correct or change drive couerly.
pling mechanism.
2 OPC Drum and Image Transfer
NO
Correct or change drive couRoller are driven properly.
pling mechanism.
3 Register roller is driven propNO
Correct or change drive couerly.
pling mechanism.
4 Fusing Unit is driven properly.
NO
Change the fuser.
YES Clean or change the fuser.
scratchy.
6 Image Transfer roller is dented
YES Change the transfer roller.
or scratchy.
NO
above steps?
Change driving unit.
Change PCB LPH.
Change PCB PRT.
Change PCB Main.
Paper transfer
section
Fusing section
Transfer roller
-
4-27
4.8 Service Call Error
When certain machine problems occur these messages will appear in the LCD.
4.8.1 Check the error message
When certain machine problems occur a Service call message will appear on the LCD. When this
message appears, access the printer maintenance mode to determine the cause of the Call Service error
message. If there are detail numbers to that error, the numbers are also available to see on this mode.
The error message will be displayed on the LCD:
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <6>, and select Service Call and press [Enter].
2. The detail of printer error will be displayed.
3. If two or more errors have occurred at the same time, press

messages.
4. Press <Reset> to go back to the standby screen.
4-28
or
of the cursor key to see all the
The errors messages and an explanation of each are outlined below.
Code

Error Message
04: Second Rx motor
Error
06: Cassette Liftup Error (First cassette)
07: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional second cassette)
08: Rx motor
Error
0B:

Fan Error
0D: Temperature / Humid Sensor Error
0E: Fan Control Thermistor Error)
11: ATDC Error (Vcont value abnormal error)
12: ATDC Error (Astd value abnormal error)
15: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional third cassette)
16: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional fourth cassette)
18:

Fuser Error
1E:

Drum fuse Error
46: ATDC Error (Initialize time-up error)
47: ATDC Error (Disconnection error)
49: ATDC Error (Toner density control time-up error)
4A: ATDC Error (Toner density high concentration error)
4B: ATDC Error (Toner density low concentration error)
4D: Toner Empty Sensor Error
04: Second Rx motor error
Causes:
The machine checks the motor error signal from two minutes after the second Rx motor starts driving.
When the error signal is detected for 100 ms, this messages will be displayed.
1. Check the connection between RX Motor2 and the PCB PRT.

2. Verify the RX Motor2 rotates when the Power is ON.
3. Check the Power is supplied to the RX Motor2.
4. Replace the RX Motor1 if it doesn't rotate.
5. Replace the PCB PRT.
6. Replace the PCB Main.
06: Cassette Liftup Error (First cassette)

07: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional second cassette)
15: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional third cassette)
16: Cassette Liftup Error (Optional fourth cassette)
Causes:
The liftup sensor does not switch on within 10 seconds, after the cassette starts to lift up the paper.
1. Check the connection between the Lift up motor and the PCB PRT.
2. Verify the Lift up motor rotates when the cassette close.
3. Replace the Lift up motor.
4-29
08: Rx motor error

Causes:
The machine checks the motor error signal from two minutes after the Rx motor starts driving. When
the error signal is detected for 100 ms, this messages will be displayed.
1. Check the connection between RX Motor1 and the PCB PRT.

2. Verify the RX Motor1 rotates when the Power is ON.
3. Check the Power is supplied to the RX Motor1.
4. Replace the RX Motor1 if it doesn't rotate.
0B: Fan Error

Causes:
The machine checks the fan error signal from two minutes after the second Rx motor starts driving.
When the error signal is detected for 100 ms, this messages will be displayed.
1. Verify the inside FAN rotates when the Power is ON.

2. Check the connection between the FAN and the PCB PRT.
3. Replace the FAN if it doesn't rotate.
0D: Temperature / Humid Sensor Error

1. Check the connection between the Temp/Humid Sensor and the PCB PRT.
2. Replace the Temp/Humid Sensor.
0E: Fan Control Thermistor Error

1. Check the connection between the PCB Thermistor and the PCB LPH.
2. Check the connection between the PCB LPH and the PCB MAIN.
3. Replace the PCB Thermistor.
5. Replace the PCB LPH.
4-30
11: ATDC Error (Vcont value abnormal error)

12: ATDC Error (Astd value abnormal error)
46: ATDC Error (Initialize time-up error)
47: ATDC Error (Disconnection error)
Vcont (Vlotage control) : This is the voltage that controls the ATDC sensor.
Astd (Answer standard) : This is target value of the toner density on the drum surface.
1. Check the connection between the Drum Cartridge and the PCB PRT.
2. Check the connection between the PCB PRT and the PCB Main.
3. Replace the Drum Cartridge.
18: Fuser error
Causes:
When the fuser miss to fill out the following conditions:
(The number indicates the detailed error code on the LCD)
4 The fuser does not become to temperature (Temp 2 :125 C) within 60 seconds.
5 The fuser detected a temperature higher than 250 C.
6 The fuser does not become warmer more than 8 seconds during printing.
7 The fuser detected a lower temperature than 35 C after the heater is set to ON for four seconds.
8 The fuser detected a higher temperature than 190 C for 50 ms when sleep mode temperature
(35 C ) and standby mode temperature (125 C ) is set up.
1. Turn on the power again, and verify the fuser warms up.
2. Check the connection between Fusing thermistor and PCB Main.
3. Check the connection between PCB Main and LVPS.
4. Check the connection between Fuser and LVPS.
5. Replace the Fuser.
6. After Replace the fuser, verify the fuser warms up when the power is ON.
8. After Replace the PCB Main, verify the fuser warms up when the power is ON.
9. Replace the LVPS.
1E: Drum fuse error
Causes:
The machine could not blowout of the fuse.
2. Check the connection between the PCB PRT and PCB Main.
4-31
49: ATDC Error (Toner density control time-up)

4A: ATDC Error (Toner density high concentration error)
4B: ATDC Error (Toner density low concentration error)
2. Check the connection between the PCB PRT and the PCB Main.
6. Replace the Screw Clutch.
4D:Toner Empty Sensor Error

1. Check the connection between the Toner Empty Sensor and the PCB PRT.
2. Check the connenction between the PCB PRT and PCB Main.
3. Replace the Toner Empty Sensor.
4-32
4.9 Error Codes
If an error occurs during a communication, a check message will be printed. The following provides an
explanation of the information found on check messages.

A possible solution to the problem
The date and time of the attempted communication
The sending location (if the remote fax has a Location ID)
The number of pages which got through before the error terminated the call
The error code
The sample document.
You will also see a code listed in the Result column of the report. Result codes indicate the specific problem
encountered:

D codes occur while dialing
R codes occur during reception
T codes occur during transmission
Here is a list of error codes the fax machine may print.
4.9.1 Dialing errors

D.0.2
The remote unit is busy. Try the call again.
D.0.3,
D.0.8
The remote unit didnt respond, the call couldnt be completed or stop was pressed during
dialing. Retry the call. If your machine repeats the message, call the remote fax units operator
and verify that unit is operating properly.
Either the remote unit didnt respond, the call somehow didnt go through or STOP was
pressed during dialing. Try the call again.
D.0.6,
D.0.7
4-33
4.9.2 Reception errors

R.1.1
T1 time-out. The calling unit was not a fax machine or the transmitting unit is having
difficulties.
R.1.2
The two fax machines were incompatible. Your machine sends and receives only ITU-T
Group 3 fax communication, the industry standard since the early 1980s.
R.1.4
Someone pressed STOP during fax reception.
R.2.3
Poor phone line conditions made fax communication impossible. Enable the one second
pause after CED on Memory Switch 020. Also try increasing the echo wait time on Memory
Switch 021 if echo is on the line.
R.3.1
No response to CFR. DCN was received from the transmitter. Poor line conditions made
communication impossible. Adjust the echo wait time on Memory Switch 021. Try increasing
the output levels via Memory Switch 011 0-3.
R.3.3
Too many errors were detected during data reception. The carrier was interrupted. Increase
the data error rate on Memory Switch 020.
R.3.4
DCN was received after FTT. Communication was not possible at 2400 bps. Poor phone line
conditions prevented fax communication. Enable the Eye Quality Check on Memory Switch
031 and 032.
R.4.1
The machine received too large length data that over your machines limit.
R.4.2
MPS/EOM/EOP was not received. Either the line disconnected before reception was
completed or too many errors were detected by the receiving unit. Adjust the data error rate
on Memory Switch 020. It may also be necessary to decrease the receive communication
speed via Memory Switch 020.
R.4.4
The receiving fax machine has reached its memory capacity.
R.5.1
DCN was received instead of RR during ECM communication.
R.5.2
Line noise or other problems prevented ECM reception.
R.8.1
A compatibility error occurred.
R.8.10
Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.
R.8.11
The fax machine timed out while waiting for the retrain signal.
4-34
4.9.3 Transmission errors

T.1.1
T1 time-out. The remote fax machine didnt respond to your machine. This usually occurs
during a manual transmission or when an incorrect number was dialed. Call someone at the
remote machine.
T.1.4
Someone pressed STOP during fax transmission.
T.2.1
CFR or FTT was not received from the remote machine. Either the phone line disconnected
during fax communication or transmission became impossible due to bad phone line
conditions. Try the call again. It may be necessary to increase the output levels on Memory
Switch 011 0~3. The receive machine may also have closed network or block junk fax
enabled.
T.2.2
The two fax machines were incompatible. No mailbox at receiver or security transmission is
enabled.
T.2.3
FTT was received from the remote machine at 2400 bps. Bad phone line conditions made
fax communication impossible. Conditions can change rapidly, so try the call later. Turn on
the echo protect tone on Memory Switch 010. Also adjust the interval between DCS and TCF
on Memory Switch 011. If the problem persists, try increasing the output levels on Memory
Switch 011 0~3.
T.3.1
The page counter in the fax machine detected a document feeder error during transmission.
Carefully re-insert the document into the feeder and re-try the call.
T.4.1
No response to MPS/EOP/EOM. Poor phone lines caused the receiving unit to disconnect.
Adjust the interval between CFR and data on Memory Switch 011. Try increasing the output
levels on Memory Switch 011 0~3. It may also be necessary to adjust the transmit speed on
Memory Switch 010.
T.4.2
RTN was received from the remote machine. After transmission began, poor line conditions
developed. Try the call again. Attempt the solutions described for the T.4.1 error.
T.4.4
Poor line conditions prevented transmission. PIP was received. The transmission was
interrupted by the call mode. The receiving unit may be experiencing problems. Try the call
again.
T.5.1
No response to RR from the remote machine. Line noise or other problems prevented ECM
transmission. Increase the ECM response time on Memory Switch 012.
T.5.2
No response to CTC. Line noise or other problems prevented ECM transmission. Increase the
ECM response time on Memory Switch 012.
T.5.3
EOR was received from the remote unit but further transmission was not possible. Adjust
Memory Switch 015 for this problem.
T.8.1
A compatibility error occurred.
T.8.10
Line noise or other problems prevented line probing.
T.8.11
The remote fax machine didnt complete the equalizer training phase.
4-35
5 Maintenance & Adjustment

5.1 Maintenance schedule...................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2 Re/Disassemble................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.2.1 COVERS.................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.2.2 PCBS........................................................................................................................ 5-17
5.2.3 SCANNING SECTION............................................................................................. 5-31
5.2.4 PRINTER SECTION................................................................................................. 5-68
5.2.5 OPTION CASSETE................................................................................................ 5-122
5.3 Adjustment.................................................................................................................... 5-136
5.3.1 Outline of printer registration adjustment............................................................... 5-136
5.3.2 Printer registration mode........................................................................................ 5-136
5.3.3 Registration adjustment.......................................................................................... 5-139
5.3.4 Zoom adjustment.................................................................................................... 5-144
5.3.5 Separation pressure adjustment............................................................................ 5-148
5.3.6 ADF skew adjustment............................................................................................ 5-149
5.3.7 Drum ATDC adjustment......................................................................................... 5-150
5-1
5.1 Maintenance schedule

Scanning Section
Parts Name
Roller Separator *1
Piece Separator *1
Contact glass & Pane *2
Sheet document press
(White sheet) *2
Exposure Lamp *2
Roller Feed
Roller Exit
Maintenance Cycle (pages)

Clean
Replace
50,000 or
3 years
50,000 or
2 years
Clean when
dirty
Clean when
dirty
1,000 hours
100,000
100,000
QTY
Reference Page
5-34
5-46
5-48, 49
5-65
1
1
1
5-50
5-41
5-40
*1 Replace these parts at the same time.

*2 It is not a maintenance parts. However, please replace when they do not work.
Printer Section
Parts Name
Roller Retard
Roller Feed
Roller Separator / Roller Pickup
Roller Pickup
Pad Pressure MP
Roller Register
Roller Exit A, B
Fuser Unit
Ozone Filter
Case dust (Molt plan)

Clean
Replace
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
100,000
150,000
150,000
QTY
Reference Page
5-109
1
1
1
5-112
5-95
5-97
1
1
1
1
1
5-93
5-88, 89
5-85
5-120
5-121
QTY
Reference Page
Developing Section
Parts Name
Drum cartridge
Toner cartridge A
Toner cartridge B
LED print head

Clean
Replace
100,000
10,000
20,000
1
1
1
See Operating
Instructions
Note: means to clean the mechanism when a paper take-up or transport failure or print quality
problems occurs.
Note: The maintenance cycle (pages or years) may be shorter than the above value according to the
environment or usage of the machine, and the documents and paper that are used. The maintenance cycle (pages or years) are not insured and early replacement of the parts may be needed
to maintain the machine quality.
5-2
5.2 Re/Disassemble
Before disassembling, disconnect the power cord and line cord.
5.2.1 COVERS.................................................................................................................... 5-5

PLATE PRINTER B......................................................................................................... 5-6
COVER PLATEN............................................................................................................ 5-6
COVER TX SIDE B......................................................................................................... 5-7
COVER TX SIDE F......................................................................................................... 5-8
GUIDE OUTER............................................................................................................... 5-9
COVER LEFT TOP......................................................................................................... 5-9
COVER RIGHT TOP..................................................................................................... 5-10
COVER FRONT UPPER............................................................................................... 5-11
COVER BACK TOP...................................................................................................... 5-12
PLATE PRINTER A....................................................................................................... 5-13
COVER L...................................................................................................................... 5-13
COVER SIDE R............................................................................................................ 5-14
COVER BACK SIDE..................................................................................................... 5-14
COVER TRAY............................................................................................................... 5-15
COVER SPEAKER....................................................................................................... 5-16
5.2.2 PCBS........................................................................................................................ 5-17
PCB ADF....................................................................................................................... 5-18
PCB PANEL A / PANEL B............................................................................................ 5-19
LCD............................................................................................................................... 5-20
PCB CONN MOT.......................................................................................................... 5-22
PCB LPH....................................................................................................................... 5-23
PCB CCD...................................................................................................................... 5-24
PCB INVERTER............................................................................................................ 5-25
PCB MAIN..................................................................................................................... 5-26
PCB VOICE................................................................................................................... 5-26
PCB NCU...................................................................................................................... 5-27
PCB PRT....................................................................................................................... 5-28
PCB SCANNER............................................................................................................ 5-28
PCB PSU HV................................................................................................................ 5-29
PCB PSU...................................................................................................................... 5-29
PCB BPSIZE................................................................................................................. 5-30
5.2.3 SCANNING SECTION............................................................................................. 5-31
TRAY DOCUMENT....................................................................................................... 5-31
SENSOR (DL1)............................................................................................................. 5-32
SENSOR (DW1) / SENSOR (DW2).............................................................................. 5-33
ROLLER SEPARATOR................................................................................................. 5-34
ROLLER PRESS........................................................................................................... 5-35
GUIDE INNER............................................................................................................... 5-36
FRAME MOTOR........................................................................................................... 5-37
CLUTCH (MG).............................................................................................................. 5-38
CLUTCH (CL)................................................................................................................ 5-39
ROLLER EXIT............................................................................................................... 5-40
ROLLER FEED............................................................................................................. 5-41
SENSOR (DS1)............................................................................................................. 5-43
SENSOR (TXIL)............................................................................................................ 5-44
SENSOR (DS2) / SENSOR (DRS)............................................................................... 5-45
PIECE SEPARATOR.................................................................................................... 5-46
HINGE........................................................................................................................... 5-47
CONTACT GLASS........................................................................................................ 5-48
PANE............................................................................................................................ 5-49
LAMP............................................................................................................................ 5-50
CARRIAGE A................................................................................................................ 5-51
MIRROR A.................................................................................................................... 5-54
CARRIAGE B................................................................................................................ 5-55
MIRROR B / MIRROR C............................................................................................... 5-57
MIRROR CARRIAGE ALIGNMENT.............................................................................. 5-58
SENSOR (HOME)......................................................................................................... 5-60
SENSOR (BSS)............................................................................................................ 5-61
FBS MOTOR................................................................................................................. 5-62
SENSOR (APS) / SENSOR (BIS)................................................................................. 5-64
SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS....................................................................................... 5-65
FRAME SCANNER....................................................................................................... 5-66
5-3
5.2.4 PRINTER SECTION................................................................................................. 5-68

TRAY MP...................................................................................................................... 5-68
COVER JAM ACCESS................................................................................................. 5-69
ROLLER TRANSFER................................................................................................... 5-70
ROLLER FEED DUPLEX A.......................................................................................... 5-71
SENSOR (DUP)............................................................................................................ 5-73
SENSOR (J1-OP)......................................................................................................... 5-74
MOTOR 1...................................................................................................................... 5-75
MOTOR 2...................................................................................................................... 5-75
CLUTCH (PAPER REGIST).......................................................................................... 5-76
CLUTCH (PAPER FEED)............................................................................................. 5-77
PCB DUPLEX............................................................................................................... 5-78
FRAME DRIVE UNIT DUPLEX..................................................................................... 5-78
MOTOR (Dupex)........................................................................................................... 5-79
CLUTCH (Duplex)......................................................................................................... 5-79
SENSOR (THRM)......................................................................................................... 5-80
FRAME DRIVE A.......................................................................................................... 5-81
SPEAKER..................................................................................................................... 5-83
SENSOR (INTERLOCK)............................................................................................... 5-84
FUSER UNIT................................................................................................................. 5-85
EXIT ASSY.................................................................................................................... 5-86
ROLLER EXIT A........................................................................................................... 5-88
ROLLER EXIT B........................................................................................................... 5-89
SENSOR (SWBK)......................................................................................................... 5-90
SENSOR (PDS)............................................................................................................ 5-91
LED............................................................................................................................... 5-92
ROLLER REGISTER.................................................................................................... 5-93
ROLLER PICKUP......................................................................................................... 5-95
PAD PRESSURE MP.................................................................................................... 5-97
SENSOR (PES BS)....................................................................................................... 5-98
SENSOR (PSS)............................................................................................................ 5-99
SOLENOID.................................................................................................................. 5-100
FAN............................................................................................................................. 5-101
CLUTCH (SCREW)..................................................................................................... 5-102
MOTOR (DC).............................................................................................................. 5-104
SENSOR (TOS).......................................................................................................... 5-105
SENSOR (CART)........................................................................................................ 5-108
ROLLER RETARD...................................................................................................... 5-109
ROLLER PICKUP / ROLLER SEPARATE.................................................................. 5-112
REMOVING THE ROLLER SEPARATE..................................................................... 5-113
REMOVING THE ROLLER PICKUP........................................................................... 5-114
SENSOR (PES).......................................................................................................... 5-115
SENSOR (LIFT UP).................................................................................................... 5-116
SENSOR (PSIZE)....................................................................................................... 5-117
ROLLER FEED........................................................................................................... 5-118
FILTER OZONE.......................................................................................................... 5-120
CASE DUST................................................................................................................ 5-121
5.2.5 OPTION CASSETE................................................................................................ 5-122
COVER REAR............................................................................................................ 5-122
PCB CASSETTE......................................................................................................... 5-122
MOTOR....................................................................................................................... 5-123
MOTOR BRACKET..................................................................................................... 5-123
CLUTCH...................................................................................................................... 5-124
FRAME DRIVE............................................................................................................ 5-124
SHAFT ROLLER FEED.............................................................................................. 5-125
ROLLER RETARD...................................................................................................... 5-126
ROLLER PICKUP / ROLLER SEPARATE.................................................................. 5-129
REMOVING THE ROLLER SEPARATOR.................................................................. 5-130
REMOVING THE ROLLER PICKUP........................................................................... 5-131
SENSOR (PES).......................................................................................................... 5-132
SENSOR (LIFT UP).................................................................................................... 5-133
SENSOR (FEED)........................................................................................................ 5-134
SENSOR (J-OP) ........................................................................................................ 5-134
SENSOR (PSIZE)....................................................................................................... 5-135
5-4
5.2.1 COVERS
Cover TX side F
(Page5-8)
Cover platen
(Page5-6)
Cover front upper

(Page5-11)
Cover panel top
(Page5-11)
Cover left top

(Page5-9)
Cover speaker
(Page5-16)
Cover side L sub

(Page5-13)
Cover tray
(Page5-15)
Cover L
(Page5-13)
Guide outer
(Page5-8)
Tray document
Cover TX side B
(Page5-7)
Cover back top
(Page5-12)
Cover right top

(Page5-10)
Plate printer B
(Page5-6)
Plate printer A
(Page5-13)
Cover back side

(Page5-14)
Cover side R
(Page5-14)
5-5
PLATE PRINTER B
1) Remove one Plate printer B mounting screw and then remove the PLATE PRINTER B.
2) Disconnect the connector from the PCB SCANNER.
PCB scanner
ADG01
1)
Plate printer B
Ground wire
NOTE: W
hen mounting the Plate printer B, pay attention not to allow the Plate printer B to pinch the
Harness.
COVER PLATEN
1) Remove the Plate printer B. Page 5-6
2) Open the Cover platen.
3) Raise the Cover platen, incline it, release the hinge tab, and then remove the COVER PLATEN.
Cover platen
Hinge
Tab
5-6
COVER TX SIDE B
2) Remove two Cover TX side B mounting screws.
AFF01
AFF01
2)
2)
3) Close the Cover platen.

4) Open the Guide outer.
5) Release three locking tabs, and then remove the COVER TX SIDE B.
Cover TX side B
Guide outer
5-7
COVER TX SIDE F
2) Remove one Cover TX side F mounting screw.
AFF01
2)

5) Release the locking tab, and then remove the COVER TX SIDE F.
Cover TX side F
Guide outer
5-8
GUIDE OUTER
1) Remove the Cover TX side F. Page 5-8
2) Remove the GUDE OUTER.
Guide outer
COVER LEFT TOP

2) Remove two Cover left top mounting screws.
3) Raise the Cover left top, release the two locking tabs, and then remove the COVER LEFT TOP.
Cover left top
ADG04
2)
5-9
COVER RIGHT TOP

2) Remove two Cover right top mounting screws.
3) Raise the Cover right top, release the two locking tabs, and then remove the COVER RIGHT TOP.
Cover right top
ADG04
2)
5-10
COVER FRONT UPPER

2) Remove the Cover left top. Page 5-9
3) Remove the Cover right top. Page 5-10
4) Remove four caps and mounting screws.
5) Remove the Cover front upper together with the panel.
Cap screw
Cover front upper
ADG01
4)
Cover panel top
6) Turn over the Cover front top, and then disconnect the connector.
7) Remove three Cover front upper mounting screws at backside of the Panel top front, and then
remove the COVER FRONT UPPER.
Cover panel top
AFF01
7)
Cover front upper
5-11
COVER BACK TOP

1) Remove the Cover platen. Page 5-6
4) Remove three Cover size H mounting screws, and then remove the Cover size H.
ADG04
4)
Cover size H
5) Remove four Cover back top mounting screws, and then remove the COVER BACK TOP by
spreading its right and left.
Cover back top

ADG04
4)
5-12
PLATE PRINTER A
1) Remove the Plate printer B. Page 5-6
2) Remove eleven Plate printer A mounting screws, and then remove the PLATE PRINTER A.
ADG01
2)
Plate printer A
COVER L
1) Remove two Cover side L sub mounting screws, and then remove the Cover side L sub.
2) Remove five Cover L mounting screws, and then remove the COVER L.
ADG04
2)
ADG04
1)
Cover side L sub
Cover L
5-13
COVER SIDE R
1) Remove three Cover side R mounting screws.
2) Release two tabs, and then remove the COVER SIDE R.
ADG04
1)
Cover side R
COVER BACK SIDE

1) Remove the Cover side R. Page 5-14
2) Remove three Cover back side mounting screws, and then remove the COVER BACK SIDE R.
ADG04
2)
Cover back side
5-14
COVER TRAY
1) Remove the Cover L. Page 5-13
2) Remove two Cover tray upper mounting screws.
3) Release the locking tab, and then remove the Cover tray upper.
ADG04
2)
Cover tray upper
4) Open the Cover front, and then remove the COVER TRAY.
Cover tray
Cover front
5-15
COVER SPEAKER
1) Open the Cover front and the Cover jam access.
2) Remove one Cover speaker mounting screw.
3) Release two tabs, and then remove the COVER SPEAKER.
Cover speaker
ADG04
2)
Cover front
Cover jam access
5-16
5.2.2 PCBS
PCB Inverter
(Page5-25)
PCB CCD
(Page5-24)
PCB Panel B
(Page5-19)
PCB Panel A
(Page5-19)
PCB PSU
PCB LPH
(Page5-23)
(Page5-29)
PCB ADF
(Page5-18)
PCB CONN MOT
(Page5-22)
PCB Scanner
(Page5-28)
PCB Duplex (Option)

(Page5-78)
PCB PRT
(Page5-28)
PCB Bpsize
(Page5-30)
PCB NCU
(Page5-27)
PCB Voice
(Page5-26)
PCB PSU HV
(Page5-29)
5-17
PCB Main
(Page5-26)
PCB ADF
1) Remove the Cover TX side B. Page 5-7
2) Disconnect the seven connectors.
3) Remove two PCB ADF mounting screws, and then remove the PCB ADF.
AFF01
3)
PCB ADF
5-18
PCB PANEL A / PANEL B

3) Remove the Cover front upper. Page 5-11
4) Remove the Panel top. Page 5-11
5) Remove ten PCB PANEL A / PANEL B mounting screws, and then remove the PCB panel A and
PCB panel B.
6) Remove the PCB PANEL A and the PCB PANEL B from the Panel top.
AFF 01
5)
PCB panel A
PCB panel B
Cover panel top
NOTE:The figure shows the panel being turned over.

7) Remove the PCB PANEL A and the PCB PANEL B.
PCB panel A
PCB panel B
5-19
LCD
4) Remove the Panel top. Page 5-11
5) Remove the PCB PANEL A. Page 5-19
6) Disconnect the connector, and then remove two Film harnesses.
7) Release three locking tabs, and then remove the LCD.
Assy LCD
PCB panel A
8) Spread the side of the Supporter LCD, slide and raise the LCD, and then remove the LCD.
LCD
Supporter LCD
5-20
NOTE: When mounting the Assy LCD, tuck the Film harness inside.
Assy LCD
PCB panel A
5-21
PCB CONN MOT

4) Remove the Cover back top. Page 5-12
5) Disconnect the connector.
6) Remove two PCB CONN MOT mounting screws, and then remove the PCB CONN MOT.
ADG01
6)
PCB CONN MOT
5-22
PCB LPH
1) Remove the Cover side L sub. Page 5-13
3) Remove the Cover tray upper. Page 5-15
4) Remove the Cover tray. Page 5-15
5) Disconnect the connector, and then pull out the Harness.
6) Remove two Duct side mounting screws.
7) Remove two Duct side mounting projection, and then remove the Duct side.
Duct side
ADG04
6)
8) Remove two Case shield mounting screws, and then remove the Case shield.
9) Disconnect one connector, and then remove two Film harnesses.
NOTE: When removing the film harnesses, be sure to unlock them.
10) Remove two PCB LPH mounting screws, and then remove the PCB LPH.
Case shild
ADG01
8)
ADG01
10)
PCB LPH
5-23
PCB CCD
4) Remove the Cover size H. Page 5-12
5) Remove the Contact glass. Page 5-48
6) Remove the Pane. Page 5-49
7) Remove three Cover scanner mounting screws, and then remove the Cover scanner.
Cover scanner
ADG01
7)
8) Remove the Film harness.

9) Remove two PCB CCD mounting screws, and then remove the PCB CCD.
ADG01
9)
PCB CCD
5-24
PCB INVERTER
7) Remove the Cover scanner. Page 5-24
8) Disconnect the two connectors.
9) Remove one Bracket inverter mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket PCB inverter.
ADG01
9)
Bracket inverter
10) Remove two Inverter mounting screws, and then remove the PCB INVERTER.
Bracket inverter
ADG01
10)
PCB Inverter
5-25
PCB MAIN
1) Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-13
2) Disconnect the connected from the PCB MAIN.
NOTE: Do not disconnect one connector (P22). (Otherwise, the backup memory is deleted.)
3) Remove five PCB MAIN mounting screws, and then remove the PCB MAIN.
ADG01
3)
PCB main
P22
NOTE: When replacing the PCB MAIN, disconnect all the connectors.
PCB VOICE
2) Remove two PCB VOICE mounting screws.
3) Remove one spacer, and then remove the PCB VOICE.
NOTE: Do not disconnect the connector.
PCB voice
ADG01
2)
NOTE: When replacing the PCB VOICE, disconnect the connectors from the PCB MAIN.
5-26
PCB NCU
3) Remove two Bracket shield D mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket shield D.
Bracket shild D
ADG01
3)
4) Remove the PCB MAIN. Page 5-26

5) Disconnect all the connectors from the PCB NCU.
6) Remove one mounting screw, and then disconnect the Ground wire.
7) Remove three PCB NCU mounting screws, and then remove the PCB NCU.
ADG01
7)
ADG01
6)
PCB NCU
Ground wire
5-27
PCB PRT
2) Disconnect all the connectors from the PCB PRT.
3) Remove two PCB PRT mounting screws, and then remove the PCB PRT.
PCB PRT
ADG01
3)
PCB SCANNER
2) Disconnect all the connectors from the PCB SCANNER.
3) Remove two PCB SCANNER mounting screws, and then remove the PCB SCANNER.
PCB scanner
ADG01
3)
5-28
PCB PSU HV
2) Remove four PCB PSU HV mounting screws, and then remove the PCB PSU HV.
3) Disconnect the three connectors.
ADG01
2)
PCB PSU HV
PCB PSU
1) Remove the Cover left. Page 5-13
3) Remove two PCB PSU mounting screws, and then pull out the PCB PSU.
4) Disconnect the three connectors.
ADG01
3)
PCB PSU
5-29
PCB BPSIZE
1) Remove the Tray MP. Page 5-68
2) Remove two the Tray A-2 MP mounting screws.
3) Release the locking tabs, and then remove the Tray A-2 MP.
4) Remove two PCB BPSIZE mounting screws, and then remove the PCB BPSIZE.
6) Remove the Knob dial.
Tray A-2 MP
AFF01
2)
AFF06
4)
PCB bpsize
Knob dial
NOTE: When mounting the Knob dial, fit the Knob dial projection in the groove of the PCB BPSIZE.
5-30
5.2.3 SCANNING SECTION

TRAY DOCUMENT
3) Remove one connector.
4) Raise the Tray document.
Tray document
5) Pass the connector vertically through the Platen cover hole, and then remove the TRAY
DOCUMENT.
Tray document
5-31
SENSOR (DL1)
1) Remove the Tray document. Page 5-31
2) Turn over the Tray document, remove three mounting screws, release five locking tabs, and then
remove the Tray document B.
AFF01
2)
Tray document B
Tray document A
3) Disconnect the connector, and then remove the SENSOR (DL1).
Sensor (DL1)
NOTE: When mounting the Sensor, pay attention to its mounting direction.
5-32
SENSOR (DW1) / SENSOR (DW2)

1) Remove the Tray document. Page 5-31
2) Remove the Tray document B. Page 5-32 Procedure 2
3) Remove the Sensor stoppers.
4) Disconnect the connectors, and then remove the SENSOR (DW1)/SENSOR (DW2).
Sensor (DW2)
Sensor (DW1)
Sensor stopper
Sensor stopper
5-33
ROLLER SEPARATOR
1) Remove the Guide outer. Page 5-8
2) Remove five Guide outer mounting screws, and the remove the Guide outer A.
AFF01
2)
Guide outer A
Roller separator
3) Remove five E-rings of the Roller separator, and then remove the gear and bearings.
ANB02 Bearing D6 8
3)
3)
ANB03
3)
Bearing D6
3)
Gear 27 0.8 D
ANB03
3)
ANB03
3)
Bearing D6
3)

5-34
4) Slide the Roller separator, and then remove the ROLLER SEPARATOR.
Roller separater
ROLLER PRESS
1) Remove the Guide outer A. Page 5-34 Procedure 2
2) Remove one Holder register mounting screw, and then remove the Holder register.
3) Remove the ROLLER PRESS.
Roller press B
AFF01
2)
Holder register
NOTE: When mounting the Roller press, pay attention to the shaft mounting direction.
5-35
GUIDE INNER
1) Open the Cover platen, and then remove one screw.
ADG01
1)

6) Disconnect the four connectors.
7) Remove four Guide inner mounting screws, and then remove the GUIDE INNER.
AFF01
7)
Guide inner
AFF01
7)
AFF01
7)
Ground wire
5-36
FRAME MOTOR
5) Remove the Guide inner. Page 5-36
6) Remove the clamp, remove one Plate drive mounting screw, and then remove the Plate drive.
7) Remove three Frame motor mounting screws, and then remove the FRAME MOTOR.
Cltch(MG)
ADG01
7)
ADG01
7)
Clamp
Flame motor
ADG01
7)
ADG04
6)
Plate drive
8) Remove one Sensor mounting screw, and then remove the Sensor.
9) Remove the E-ring and gears.
ADG01
8)
Sensor (TXIL)
Gear 28/36
ANB02
9)
Gear 34/75
Flame motor
NOTE: Mount the Plate drive in position after mounting the Guide inner to the Cover platen
5-37
CLUTCH (MG)
6) Remove the Frame motor. Page 5-37
7) Remove the CLUTCH (MG).
9) Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the shaft.
Gear 15 0.5 D
Bearing D6
Shaft clutch A
Clutch (MG)
AVA01
9)
Bearing D6
5-38
CLUTCH (CL)
7) Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the CLUTCH (CL).
Clutch (CL)
AVA01
7)
5-39
ROLLER EXIT
7) Remove the Clutch (MG). Page 5-38
8) Remove three Spring P earth mounting screws, and the remove the Spring P earth.
Spring P earth
AFF01
8)
9) Remove the E-ring, and then remove the bearings.

10) Remove the ROLLER EXIT.
11) Remove the E-ring, and then remove the gear and bearings.
Gear 37 0.5 D
ANB02
11)
Bearing D6
11)
Roller exit
Bearing D6
9)
ANB03
9)
5-40
ROLLER FEED
7) Remove the Clutch (MG) and Clutch (CL). Page 5-38, 5-39
8) Remove the Spring P earth. Page 5-40
9) Remove the Plate document press.
10) Remove the E-ring, and then remove the bearing.
Plate document press
Bearing
10)
ANB03
10)
11) Remove the gear, and then remove the pin.

12) Remove the E-ring, and then remove the bearing.
AQA04
11)
AVA02
12)
Gear 76 0.5
Bearing
12)
5-41
13) Remove four Frame drive mounting screws, and then remove the Frame drive.
14) Remove the ROLLER FEED.
Roller feed
Frame drive
AFF01
13)
5-42
SENSOR (DS1)
2) Remove one Sensor (DS1) mounting screw, and then remove the SENSOR (DS1).
Sensor (DS1)
ADG01
2)
4) Remove the Sensor stopper, and then remove the SENSOR.
Sensor (DS1)
Plate sensor
Sensor stopper
5-43
SENSOR (TXIL)
2) Remove one Plate sensor open mounting screw, and then remove the Plate sensor open.
ADG01
2)
Plate sensor open
Sensor stopper
Plate sensor open
Sensor (TXIL)
5-44
SENSOR (DS2) / SENSOR (DRS)

2) Remove two Sensor cover mounting screws.
3) Remove the Cover sensor.
NOTE: Put a small screwdriver into the center and remove the Cover sensor.
AFF01
2)
Cover sensor
4) Remove each one of Sensor (DS2)/Sensor (DRS) mounting screws, and then remove the SENSOR
(DS2)/SENSOR (DRS).
5) Disconnect the connectors.
AFF01
2)
Sensor (DRS)
AFF01
2)
Sensor (DS2)
6) Remove the Sensor stopper, and then remove the SENSOR (DS2)/SENSOR (DRS).
Sensor stopper
Sensor stopper
Plate sensor DRS
Plate sensor DS2

Sensor (DS2)
5-45
Sensor (DRS)
PIECE SEPARATOR
2) Release two locking tabs, and then remove the PIECE SEPARATOR.
Piece separator
5-46
HINGE
2) Remove three Hinge mounting screws, and then remove the HINGE.
AHB01
2)
AHB01
2)
Hinge (L)
Hinge (R)
NOTE: When mounting the Hinges, pay attention to the mounting position.
Mount the Hinge (L) in a position where the Hinge comes in contact with the Cover platen.
Align the Hinge (R) with the graduation and the Cover platen graduation.
Hinge (L)
Hinge (R)
NOTE: Cover platen angle can be adjusted with the position of the Hinge (R) graduation.
5-47
CONTACT GLASS
3) Remove the CONTACT GLASS.
Contact glass C
NOTE: M
ount the Contact glass so that the face lined with film comes to upper left side.
Handle the fragile Contact glass with due care.
5-48
PANE
5) Remove the Cover size V.
6) Remove the PANE.
Cover size V
Pane
NOTE: Handle the fragile Pane with due care.
5-49
LAMP
8) Remove the Blind sheet.
9) Move the Carriage to the Lamp replacing position (notch), and then remove two Lamp mounting
screws.
10) Disconnect the connector, and then remove the LAMP.
ADG01
9)
Blind sheet
Lamp
Holder lamp B
NOTE: When mounting the Lamp, pass the Harness below the Holder lamp B projection.
5-50
CARRIAGE A
1) Open the Cover platen. Page 5-6
8) Remove the Blind sheet. Page 5-50
9) Disconnect the connector from between the FPC harness and the Inverter.
10) Remove one FPC harness mounting screw, and then remove the FPC harness.
AFF01
10)
Inverter
Assy Lamp-CBL
5-51

12) Move the Carriage to the replacing position (notch).
13) Tuck the tab of the Guide FPC center inside, and then raise the Guide FPC out of position.
14) Pull out the FPC harness from the Carriage B hole.
Guide FPC
FPC harness
NOTE: W
hen puling out the FPC harness from the Carriage hole, pay attention not to damage the
film.
15) Put a screwdriver into the hole at the right side of the replacing position, and then remove the
screw at the center of the Holder belt AB.
16) Remove the screw at the center of the Holder belt AF.
AEH01
15)
Holder belt AB
AEH01
16)
5-52
Holder belt AF
17) Remove the Belt from the locking tabs of the Holder belt AB and the Holder belt AF.
Holder belt AB
Holder belt AF
Belt
Belt
18) Move the Carriage A askew, and then remove the CARRIAGE A.
Carriage A
NOTE: Magnets are attached at the both ends of the Carriage A.
5-53
MIRROR A
9) Remove the Lamp. Page 5-50
10) Remove the Carriage A. Page 5-51
11) Remove the Clamp mirrors AB, AF.
12) Remove the MIRROR A.
Mirror A
Clamp mirror AB
Clamp mirror AF
NOTE: Pull out the Clamp mirror by pulling the spring to the Mirror side.
NOTE: Mount the Mirror A so that its surface faces upwards and the side C downwards.
5-54
CARRIAGE B
10) Remove two Holder belt B mounting screws.
ADG01
10)
Holder belt B
Holder belt B
Carriage B
11) Remove the Belts from the Holder belt B locking tabs.
Holder belt B
Holder belt B
Belt
Belt
5-55
12) Move the Carriage B askew, and then remove the CARRIAGE B.
Carriage B
5-56
MIRROR B / MIRROR C
10) Remove the Carriage B. Page 5-55
11) Remove the four Clamp mirrors B.
Clamp mirror B
Mirror B
Mirror C
Clamp mirror B
Lot number
Lot number
NOTE: W
hen mounting the Mirrors, pay attention to their top and bottom faces. The face marked
with lot number is the bottom side. (The face without mark is the top side.)
NOTE: P
ay attention to the mounting position.
Mirror B comes on the upper side.
Mirror C comes on the lower side. (The Mirror C is 2 mm larger than the Mirror.)
Mount the mirrors so that their surfaces face each other as shown in the figure.
5-57
MIRROR CARRIAGE ALIGNMENT

1) Put the Carriage A askew in the Frame scanner, and then move it to the replacing position (notch).
2) Put the Belt through the Holder belt AF and the Holder belt AB, and then lock it temporarily.
Holder belt AB
Holder belt AF
AFF01
2)
Frame scanner
3) Move the Carriage A to the position where the projections of its both ends come in contact with the
right side inner wall of the chassis.
4) Put the Carriage B askew in the Frame scanner.
Holder belt B
Holder belt B
Frame scaner
5-58
5) To mount the Carriage A, put a screwdriver in the Frame scanners right-side holes and tighten the
Holder belt AF and Holder belt AB mounting screws.
6) Tighten the Holder belt B of the Carriage B.
5-59
SENSOR (HOME)
8) Remove the Cover front lower. Page 5-66
10) Remove the Sensor (Home) stopper, and the remove the SENSOR (HOME).
Carriage A
Sensor stopper
Sensor (Home)
NOTE: When carrying out the work, manually move the Carriage A to the center.
5-60
SENSOR (BSS)
7) Remove one Sensor (BSS) mounting screw.
8) Disconnect the connector, and then remove the SENSOR (BSS).
AFF01
7)
Sensor (BSS)
5-61
FBS MOTOR
5) Remove four Bracket hinge R mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket hinge R.
6) Remove the Harness from the Bracket hinge R clamp, and then disconnect the connector.
ADG04
5)
Bracket hinge R
7) Remove the Spring.

8) Remove three Bracket motor mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket motor.
ADG04
8)
Spring C tension A
Bracket motor
5-62
9) Remove two Bracket motor mounting screws, and then remove the FBS MOTOR.
Bracket motor
Motor
AJD02
9)
NOTE: M
ount the Bracket motor temporarily by screws. Apply the Spring in position and tighten up
the screws.
5-63
SENSOR (APS) / SENSOR (BIS)

5) Remove four Bracket hinge R mounting screws, and then remove the Bracket hinge R.
ADG04
5)
Brown
Red
Bracket hinge L
7) Remove the Sensor (APS)/ Sensor (BIS) stopper, and then remove the Sensor (APS)/ Sensor
(BIS).
Sensor stopper
Sensor stopper
Sensor (APS)
Sensor (BIS)
5-64
SHEET DOCUMENT PRESS

2) Remove the release coated paper of the double-adhesive tape of the Sheet document press.
3) Put the Sheet document press on the panel with its adhesive side facing up.
4) Place the Sheet document press 1 mm away from the document reference position.
6) Open the Cover platen, and then apply the Sheet document press firmly.
1mm
1mm
5-65
FRAME SCANNER
5) Remove three Cover front lower screws, and then release three Cover front lower locking tabs.
6) Release one right locking tab, and then remove the Cover front lower.
NOTE: Mount the Cover front lower in the reverse order.
7) Remove two mounting screws.
Cover front lower
ADG03
7)
ADG01
5)
8) Remove the Plate printer B. (Only the ADF specification. Page 5-6)
10) Disconnect the five connectors from the PCB SCANNER, and then remove one film harness.
PCB scanner
5-66
11) Remove two Frame scanner mounting screws, and then remove the FRAME SCANNER.
Frame scanner
ADG01
11)
5-67
5.2.4 PRINTER SECTION

TRAY MP
3) Remove two mounting screws.
4) Release two locking tabs, and then remove the Piece B and Piece F.
5) Remove the TRAY MP.
Pice B
Pice F
AFF01
3)
Tray MP
5-68
COVER JAM ACCESS

3) Remove two screws, and Cover Cam F and Cover Cam B.
Cover cam B
Cover cam F
4) Remove two screws, and then disconnect the Ground wire.

5) Open the Cover jam access.
6) Remove two knob lock jacks, and then remove the COVER JAM ACCESS.
ADG01
3)
Knob lock JAC
Knob lock JAC
Cover jam acsses
Knob lock JAC
5-69
ROLLER TRANSFER
2) Release four locking tabs, and then remove the Guide transfer B.
Guide transfer B
3) Remove the Cover bracket TF.

4) Release the locking tabs, and then remove the Bracket transfer B and the Bracket transfer A.
5) Remove the ROLLER TRANSFER.
6) Remove the Roller gap B and the Bracket transfer B.
7) Remove the gear, the Roller gap A and the Bracket transfer F.
Roller gap B
Bracket transfer B
Cover bracket TF
Roller transfer
Bracket transfer F
Roller gap A
Gear 25H 0.6
5-70
ROLLER FEED DUPLEX A

2) Remove four Guide transfer mounting screws, and then remove Guide transfer.
AFA07
3)
Guide duplex Assy
3) Remove four Guide duplex Assy mounting screws, and then remove the Guide duplex Assy.
Guide transfer
AFF01
2)
5-71
4) Remove the belt.

5) Remove two plastic rings, and then remove the Flange pulleys and the gears.
6) Remove two plastic rings.
7) Remove four bearings, and then remove the ROLLER FEED DUPLEX.
Belt
AVA01
5) Frange pulley
Gear 20/25P
Bearing
Roller feed duplex A
AVA01
5)
Frange pulley
Gear 20/25P
Bearing
Bearing
Bearing
AVA01
6)
NOTE: When mounting the Roller feed duplex, pass the bearings over the springs.
Bearing
Bearing
Spring T FG duplex
5-72
SENSOR (DUP)
2) Remove the Guide transfer. Page 5-71
3) Remove the Guide duplex Assy. Page 5-71) Remove the Sensor stopper, and then remove the
SENSOR.
Guide duplex Assy
Sensor stopper
Sensor (DUP)
5-73
SENSOR (J1-OP)
1) Remove the Plate printer A.
3) Remove the PCB DUPLEX. (Only the DUPLEX specification. Page 5-78)
4) Remove one Bracket sensor jack mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket sensor jack.
ADG01
2)
Bracket sensor jac
Sensor (J1-OP)
Sensor stopper
5-74
MOTOR 1
3) Remove four Motor 1 mounting screws, and then remove the Motor 1.
Motor 1
AJD01
3)
MOTOR 2
1)
Remove the Plate printer A. Page 5-13
3) Remove four Motor 2 mounting screws, and then remove the Motor 2.
Motor 2
AJD01
3)
5-75
CLUTCH (PAPER REGIST)

1)
2) Remove the PCB PSU HV. Page 5-29
4) Remove three Motor bracket mounting screws, and then remove the Motor bracket.
Motor bracket
ADG01
4)
5) Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the CLUTCH.

Clutch
AVA02
6)
5-76
CLUTCH (PAPER FEED)

3) Remove the Motor bracket. Page 5-123
AVA01
5)
Clutch
5-77
PCB DUPLEX
2) Disconnect all the connectors from the PCB DUPLEX.
3) Remove two PCB DUPLEX mounting screws, and then remove the PCB DUPLEX.
ADG01
3)
PCB duplex
FRAME DRIVE UNIT DUPLEX

3) Remove the PCB DUPLEX. Page 5-78
4) Remove three Frame drive unit duplex mounting screws, and then remove the FRAME DRIVE
UNIT DUPLEX.
PCB duplex
ADG01
4)
Frame drive unit duplex
5-78
MOTOR (Dupex)
NOTE: The Motor can be removed with the Frame drive unit duplex being mounted to the machine.
3) Remove two Motor mounting screws, and then remove the MOTOR.
ACE01
3)
Motor
CLUTCH (Duplex)
NOTE: The Clutch can be removed with the Frame drive unit duplex being mounted to the machine.
3) Remove one Bracket mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket and bearing.
4) Remove the CLUTCH.
Bearing
Clutch
ADG01
3)
Bracket
5-79
SENSOR (THRM)
1) Remove the Cover printer A. Page 5-13
3) Remove one Sensor mounting screw, and then remove the SENSOR.
Sensor (THRM)
AFF01
3)
5-80
FRAME DRIVE A
1)
2) Remove the PCB DUPLEX, and then remove Frame drive unit duplex.
(Only the DUPLEX specification. Page5-78)
3) Remove the Motor 1. Page 5-75
4)
Remove the Motor 2. Page 5-75
7) Remove the Clutch (paper regist). Page 5-76
8) Remove the Clutch (paper feed). Page 5-77
9) Remove two Cover PCB HV mounting screws, and then remove the Cover PCB.
NOTE: W
hen removing the Cover PCB HV, pay attention not to allow the spring to drop and get
lost.
Spring
Cover PCB HV
ADG04
9)
5-81
11) Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the Flange.
12) Remove the belt.
Belt
Frange
AVA02
11)
13) Remove one plastic ring.

14) Remove six Frame drive A mounting screws, and then remove the FRAME DRIVE A.
15) Remove the bearing.
Drive A assy
ADG01
14)
Bearing
AVA02
13)
5-82
SPEAKER
1) Remove the Cover speaker. Page 5-16
2) Remove one Holder speaker mounting screw, and then remove the Holder speaker.
ADG04
2)
Holder speaker
4) Remove two Holder mounting screws, and then remove the Holder.
5) Remove the SPEAKER.
AFF01
4)
Holder
Speaker
5-83
SENSOR (INTERLOCK)
2) Remove the Speaker. Page 5-83
4) Remove one screw.
5) Release one locking tab, and then remove the Holder IL.
Holder IL
ADG04
4)
6) Release two locking tabs, and then remove the Plate sensor IL.
7) Remove the SENSOR.
Plate sensor IL
Sensor (Inter lock)
5-84
FUSER UNIT
2) Remove two Fuser unit mounting screws.
3) Open the Cover guide exit, and then remove the FUSER UNIT.
Cover guide exit
Fuser unit
ABF02
2)
ABF02
2)
5-85
EXIT ASSY
3) Remove the Holdert speaker. Page 5-8
4) Remove three screws.
AFF01
4)
F. G. wire
ADG01
4)
5)
6) Remove the PCB DUPLEX, and then Frame drive unit duplex.
(Only the DUPLEX specification. Page 5-78)
7) Remove the Frame drive unit duplex.
AFF01
7)
5-86

9) Remove the Cover back side. Page 5-14
10) Remove one Cover speaker back mounting screw, and then remove the Cover speaker back.
Cover speaker back
ADG04
10)
11) Open the Cover guide exit, and then remove three Exit Assy mounting screws.
12) Remove the EXIT ASSY.
Cover guide exit
Exit Assy
5-87
ADG04
11)
ROLLER EXIT A
1) Remove the Exit Assy. Page 5-87
2) Remove one screw, and then disconnect the Ground wire.
3) Remove one screw, and then remove the Plate terminal and the Spring P.
Exit Assy
Plate terminal
F. G. wire
AFF01
3)
Spring p FG resister
AFF06
2)
4) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Bearing.

5) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Gear clutch.
7) Remove the ROLLER EXIT A.
AVA04
5)
Gear clutch
Bearing
AVA01
6)
Roller exit A
Bearing
AVA01
4)
5-88
ROLLER EXIT B
1)
Remove the Exit Assy. Page 5-87
2) Disconnect the Ground wire. Page 5-69
3) Remove the Plate terminal and the Spring P. Page 5-88
5) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Gear.
6) Remove the Bearing.
7) Remove the ROLLER EXIT B.
Gear 20
AVA04
5)
Bearing
Bearing
AVA01
4)
Roller exit B
5-89
SENSOR (SWBK)
4) Release two locking tabs, and then remove the Bracket sensor.
Bracket sensor
5) Remove the Sensor plate, and then remove the SENSOR.

Sensor (SWBK)
Sensor stopper
5-90
SENSOR (PDS)
1)
Remove the Cover side L sub. Page 5-13
4) Release the locking tabs, and then remove the Bracket sensor.
Bracket sensor
5) Remove the Sensor plate, and then remove the SENSOR.

Sensor (PDS)
Sensor stopper
5-91
LED
1) Open the Cover front.
3) Return the Knob, and then pull out the LED unit.
4) Release two locking tabs, and then remove the LED.
LED
Knob LED
LED unit
5) Remove two Film harnesses.

NOTE: When removing the Film harnesses, unlock them.
Harness
Plate FG LED
Plate FG LED
LED
NOTE: M
ount the LED so that the Plate FG LED would touch the inside wall of the LED. Otherwise
it may be damaged.
LED
Plate FG LED
5-92
ROLLER REGISTER
2) Remove the Frame drive unit Duplex. (Only the DUPLEX specification. Page 5-78)
3) Remove the Frame drive A. Page 5-81
4) Remove one screw, and then remove the Spring P.
5) Remove the Spring C (yellow).
Spring C resister rear
Spring P FG resister
ADG01
4)
6) Remove the right Bearing regist D8.

7) Remove the left Bearing regist D8, and then remove the Regist Assy.
Bearing regist D8
Bearing regist D8
Regist Assy
5-93
8) Remove the two Bearing regist D8s.

9) Remove the gear.
10) Remove the Knob lever regist and the Knob lever regist B.
11) Remove the E-ring.
12) Remove the Guide paper.
Bearing regist D8
Knob lever regist B
Gear 16 regist
Roller regist
ANB05
11)
Knob lever regist
Guide paper
Spring C resister front
Bearing regist D8
5-94
ROLLER PICKUP
4) Remove the Cover jam access. Page 5-69
5) Remove two MP guide Assy mounting screws, and then remove the MP guide Assy.
ADG01
5)
MP guide Assy
6) Remove the Bracket shaft MP (F) and the Bearing.

8) Remove the Bearing, and then remove the Roller pickup MP.
9) Remove the Cam flapper MP.
Roller pickup MP
Bearing
Cam flapper MP
Bearing
Bracket shaft MP F
AVA01
7)
5-95
10) Remove the E-ring, and then remove the Roller.

ANA07
10)
Roller
NOTE: When mounting the Roller, pay attention to the mounting direction.
When the Roller is turned clockwise, it is locked. (The Shaft turns.)
When the Roller is turned counterclockwise, it is unlocked. (The Shaft does not turn.)
FREE
LOCK
Shaft
Roller
5-96
PAD PRESSURE MP
5) Remove the MP guide Assy. Page 5-95
6) Remove the PAD PRESSURE MP.
Pad pressure MP
5-97
SENSOR (PES BS)

5) Release two hooks, and then remove the Flapper MP.
NOTE: Raise the Flapper MP and then release the hooks.
Flapper MP

Sensor stopper
Sensor (PES BS)
5-98
SENSOR (PSS)
2) Remove one Bracket PSS mounting screw.
3) Hold up the Guide paper and the Feeler PSS, and then remove the Bracket PSS.
Guide paper
Feeler PSS
Bracket PSS
ADG04
2)

Sensor stopper
Sensor (PSS)
NOTE: W
hen mounting the Sensor, pay attention not to allow the Feeler PSS to touch the wire
Harness.
5-99
SOLENOID
3) Remove one Bracket solenoid mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket solenoid.
4) Pull out one connector.
5) Remove the Harness from the clamp, and then pull it out through the hole.
Bracket solenoid MP
ADG01
3)
6) Remove one Solenoid mounting screw, and then remove the SOLENOID.
ADG01
6)
Solenoid
5-100
FAN
4) Remove the Filter ozone.
6) Release two locking tabs, and then remove the FAN.
Fan
Filter ozone
7) Remove the Holder fan.
Holder fan
Fan
5-101
CLUTCH (SCREW)
3) Remove the Bracket shield D. Page 5-27
5) Remove the PCB VOICE. Page 5-26
6) Remove the PCB NCU. Page 5-27
7) Remove one Bracket connector mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket connector.
Bracket connector
ADG01
7)
8) Remove six Case shield mounting screws, and then remove the Case shield.
Case shilde
ADG01
8)
.
5-102

11) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the CLUTCH.
AVA01
9)
Gear 20/40
AVA01
11)
Clutch
5-103
MOTOR (DC)
7) Remove the Bracket connector. Page 5-102
8) Remove the Case shield. Page 5-102
9) Disconnect one connector.
10) Remove three Motor mounting screws, and then remove the MOTOR.
Motor (DC)
ABF05
10)
5-104
SENSOR (TOS)
7) Remove the Bracket connector. Page 5-102
8) Remove the Case shield. Page 5-102
9) Remove the Clutch (screw). Page 5-103 Procedure 11
11) Remove the Bearing.
12) Remove two plastic rings, and then remove two Pulley guides.
13) Remove the belt.
14) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Pulley gear.
15) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the bearing.
Gear 32 0.8 oneway
Bearing
AVA01
10)
Pulley guide
AVA01
12)
Bearing
AVA01
15)
AVA01
14)
Pulley gear 32/60
AVA01
12)
Pulley guide
NOTE: When mounting the Gear which was removed in 10, pay attention to the mounting direction.
When the Gear is turned clockwise, it is locked. When turned counterclockwise, it is unlocked.
FREE
LOCK
5-105
16) Remove six Frame drive mounting screws, and then remove the Frame drive F.
Frame drive F
ADG01
16)
AFF01
16)
ADG01
16)
17) Remove four Chassis pillar mounting screws, and then remove the Chassis pillar.
NOTE: There is no need to remove the harness.
ADG01
17)
Chassis pillar
5-106
18) Remove four Hopper Assy mounting screws, and then remove the Hopper Assy.
Hopper Assy
ADG04
18)
19) Remove one Bracket mounting screw, and then remove the Bracket enpty.
Bracket enpty
21) Remove two Sensor mounting screws, and the remove the SENSOR.
ACE01
21)
Sensor (TOS)
5-107
AFF01
19)
SENSOR (CART)
1) Remove the Cover side L sub.
Page 5-13
2) Remove the Cover L.
Page 5-13
3)
Remove the Cover tray upper, and then remove the Cover tray. Page 5-15
4)
Remove the Spring
C
CT SW, and then remove the Piece
CT
SW.
Piece CT SW
Spring C CT SW

Sensor (CART)
Sensor stopper
5-108
ROLLER RETARD
1) Pull out the Cassette.
2) Remove two Duct cable mounting screws, and then remove the Duct cable.
Duct cable
ADG01
2)

4) Remove two Pickup Assy mounting screws, and then remove the Pickup Assy.
Pickup Assy
ADG01
4)
5-109
5) Remove two Retard unit mounting screws, and then remove the Retard unit.
ADG01
5)
Retard unit
6) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Shaft retard.
7) Remove the Guide retard.
Guide retard
ANB01
6)
Retard
Spring retard
Shaft retard
Base retard
5-110
8) Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the ROLLER RETARD.
AVA01
8)
Roller retard
Bracket retard
Note: When you reassemble the
Pickup Assy, be sure that the notch of the Shaft-Pickup couples to

the Pickup Assy correctly. If not, the first paper picked up from that cassette jams. But after the
first paper jam, the shaft couples to the assy and the paper will not jam after it.
5-111
ROLLER PICKUP / ROLLER SEPARATE

2) Remove the Duct cable. Page 5-109
3) Remove the Pickup Assy. Page 5-109
4) Remove the Retard unit. Page 5-110 Procedure 5
5) Remove two Guide A pickup mounting screws, and then remove the Guide A pickup.
6) Remove four Cover pickup mounting screws, and then remove the Cover pickup.
ADG01
5)
Guide A pickup
ADG01
6)
Cover pickup
AFF01
6)

8) Remove two Bearings, and then remove the Roller pickup unit.
AVA01
7)
Roller pickup unit
Bearing
Bearing
AVA01
7)
5-112
REMOVING THE ROLLER SEPARATE

2) Remove the Feeler.
3) Remove the Spring and the Collar from the Bracket.
4) Remove the Roller separator unit.
AVA01
1)
Roller separate unit
Spring
Collar separate
Bracket
Feller
AVA01
1)
5) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the ROLLER SEPARATE.
Roller separate
AVA01
5)
5-113
REMOVING THE ROLLER PICKUP

2) Remove two Bearings.
3) Remove the Roller pickup unit.
AVA01
1)
Bearing
Bearing
AVA01
1)
Roller pickup unit
4) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the ROLLER PICKUP.
Roller pickup
AVA01
4)
5-114
SENSOR (PES)
4) Remove the Retard unit. Page 5-110
5) Remove the Guide A pickup. Page 5-112
6) Remove the Cover pickup. Page 5-112
Sensor (PES)
Sensor stopper
Feller
5-115
SENSOR (LIFT UP)

4) Remove the Retard unit. Page 5-110 Procedure 5
5) Remove the Guide A pickup. Page 5-112
NOTE: Push down the Pickup unit, and then remove the SENSOR.
Sensor (Lift up)
Pickup unit
Sensor stopper
5-116
SENSOR (PSIZE)
3) Remove two Sensor mounting screws, and then remove the SENSOR.
Sensor (Psize)
5-117
ROLLER FEED
2) Remove the Cassette.
5) Remove the Sensor (PSIZE). Page 5-117
6) Remove one Holder cassette screw.
ADG01
6)

8) Remove the Frame drive A. Page 5-81
9) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the bearing.
10) Remove two plastic rings, and then remove the bearing.
11) Remove one Holder casette screw.
AFF01
11)
Bearing
AVA01
10)
Gear 17 0.8 ONEWAY
AVA01
9)
5-118
12) Remove the Holder cassette R with the Roller feed.
Holder cassette R
13) Remove one plastic ring.

14) Remove the bearing, and then remove the ROLLER FEED.
Roller feed
Bearing
AVA01
13)
5-119
FILTER OZONE
1) Remove the Cover side L Sub. Page 5-13
3) Remove the Cover tray upper, and then remove the Cover tray. Page 5-15
4) Remove the FILTER OZONE.
Filter ozone
5-120
CASE DUST
1) Open the Cover front.
3) Remove the Fuser unit. Page 5-85
4) Remove two Case dust screws.
AFF01
4)
5) Remove the Case dust over the projection.
Case dust
5-121
5.2.5 OPTION CASSETE

COVER REAR
1. Remove four Cover rear mounting screws, and then remove the COVER REAR.
AFF01
1)
Cover rear
PCB CASSETTE
1) Remove the Cover rear. Page 5-122
2) Disconnect all the connectors from the machine.
3) Remove two PCB CASSETTE mounting screws, and then remove the PCB CASSETTE.
ADG01
3)
PCB cassette
5-122
MOTOR
2) Remove one connector.
3) Remove two Motor mounting screws, and then remove the MOTOR.
ACE01
3)
Motor
MOTOR BRACKET
3) Remove three Motor bracket mounting screws, and then remove the MOTOR BRACKET.
Motor bracket
ADG01
3)
5-123
CLUTCH
AVA01
2)
Clutch
FRAME DRIVE
3) Remove three screws, and then remove the FRAME DRIVE.
Frame drive
ADG01
3)
5-124
SHAFT ROLLER FEED

3) Remove the Frame drive. Page 5-124
4) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove one Gear.
5) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove one Bearing.
6) Open the Cover jam, release two hooks, and then remove the Cover jam.
7) Remove the plastic ring, and then slide the bearing to the left, and then remove the SHAFT
ROLLER FEED.
AVA01 Bearing
5)
AVA01
4)
Gear 16
Bearing
AVA01
7)
Cover jam
Shaft roller feed
5-125
ROLLER RETARD
2) Remove two Duct cable clamping screws, and then remove the Duct cable.
Duct cable
ADG01
2)
3) Open the Cover jam.

5) Remove two Pickup Assy mounting screws, and then remove the Pickup Assy.
Cover jam
Pickup Assy
ADG01
5)
5-126
6) Remove two Retard unit mounting screws, and then remove the Retard unit.
Retard unit
ADG01
6)
7) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the Shaft retard.
8) Remove the Guide retard.
Guide retard
ANB01
7)
Retard
Spring retard
Shaft retard
Base retard
5-127
9) Remove the plastic ring, and then remove the ROLLER RETARD.
AVA01
9)
Roller retard
Bracket retard
5-128
ROLLER PICKUP / ROLLER SEPARATE

5) Remove four Cover pickup mounting screws, and then remove the Cover pickup.
Cover pickup
ADG01
5)
AFF01
5)

7) Remove two Roller pickup unit mounting screws, and then remove the Roller pickup unit.
AVA01
6)
Roller pickup unit
Bearing
AVA01
6)
5-129
Bearing
REMOVING THE ROLLER SEPARATOR

3) Remove the Spring and the Collar from the Bracket.
4) Remove the Roller separator unit.
AVA01
1)
Roller separate unit
Spring
Collar separate
Bracket
Feller
AVA01
1)
5) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the ROLLER SEPARATOR.
Roller separate
AVA01
5)
5-130
REMOVING THE ROLLER PICKUP

2) Remove two bearings.
3) Remove the Roller pickup unit.
AVA01
1)
Bearing
Bearing
AVA01
1)
Roller pickup unit
4) Remove one plastic ring, and then remove the ROLLER PICKUP.
Roller pickup
AVA01
4)
5-131
SENSOR (PES)
Sensor (PES)
Sensor stopper
Feller
5-132
SENSOR (LIFT UP)

NOTE: Push down the Pickup unit, and then remove the SENSOR.
Sensor (Lift up)
Pickup unit
Sensor stopper
5-133
SENSOR (FEED)
NOTE: When removing the Sensor, raise the Feeler.
Sensor (Feed)
Sensor stopper
Feeler
SENSOR (J-OP)
Sensor (J-OP)
Sensor stopper
5-134
SENSOR (PSIZE)
3) Remove two Sensor mounting screws, and then remove the SENSOR.
Sensor (Psize)
5-135
5.3 Adjustment
5.3.1 Outline of printer registration adjustment
1. Adjust the printer registration of the first cassette.
2. Adjust the scan position and zoom for ADF and FBS.
3. After performing step1 and 2, adjust printer position for each cassette.
5.3.2 Printer registration mode

This mode adjusts the print registration for each paper source.
1. Press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <3>.
2. Select Vertical registration or Horizontal registration and press [Enter].

3. To adjust the vertical registration, go to step 4.
To adjust the horizontal registration, select the paper source, and press [Enter].
4. Adjust the printer registration:

For example:
When you set +12.3 for Vertical registration, the printing image moves 12.3 mm downward. If you set
12.3, the printing image moves 12.3 mm upward.
When you set +12.3 for Horizontal registration, the printing image moves 12.3 mm rightward. If you
set 12.3, the printing image moves 12.3 mm leftward. You can adjust between 12.7 mm and
+12.7 mm.
To adjust the registration to minus (-), press [-].
5. Press [Enter] to save the settings.

6. To return to the standby, press <Reset>.
Note: If you adjust the printer registration using this mode, the value entered by the machine parameter will
also be overwritten.
5-136
Printer registration (top)
Ladder patern
Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range.
Standard
Setting Range
-12.7 to 12.7 (mm)
(0.1 mm step)
10 1.9 (mm)
Adjustment procedure
1. Load A3 size paper to the cassette.
2. Use the Unique Switch 52 to adjust the printing margin to 0 mm. (bit 0, 1 0)
3. Printout the test pattern Ladder. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, [Enter], select Ladder and
press [Enter].)
4. Check width A on the test pattern Ladder meets the specifications.
If width A falls outside the specified range, perform following steps to make the adjustment.
5. To use the Printer registration mode, press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <3>.
6. Refer to the last page and adjust the registration.
7. After you have finished the adjustment, you must reenter the setting of Unique Switch 52, you
changed in step 2.
5-137
Printer registration (side)
Ladder pattern
Adjust so that width A on the test pattern Checkered output falls within the following range.
Standard
Adjustment Tool
Machine parameter: 100, 120, 140, 160
10 2.3 (mm)
110, 130, 150, 170
Setting Range
12.7 to 12.7 (mm)
(0.6773 mm step)
1. Load A3 size paper to the cassette.
3. Printout the test pattern Ladder. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9>, [Enter], select Ladder and
press [Enter].)
4. Check width A on the test pattern Ladder meets the specifications.
If width A falls outside the specified range, perform following steps to make the adjustment.
5. To use the Printer registration mode, press <Menu>, <*>, <4>, <3>.
6. Refer to the last page and adjust the registration.
changed in step 2.
Important: The setting you have entered in Printer registration mode is reflected in the following
Machine parameters.
Cassette1 : Machine parameter 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170
Bypass Tray :
Machine parameter 107, 117, 127, 137, 147, 157, 167, 177
Dupex printing : Machine parameter 108, 128
5-138
5.3.3 Registration adjustment

FBS registration (top)
1.25
1.00
0.20
0.25
0.75
Test Chart
0.15
0.30
0.55
A
0.10
1.40
Edge of the paper
Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st cassette
and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.
Standard
Adjustment Tool
10 2.4 (mm)
Machine parameter: 018
Setting Range
4.36 4.36 (mm)
(0.141 mm step)
1. Load A3 size paper to the 1st cassette.
3. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-02 on the FBS glass.
4. Make a copy of it in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.
5. Check that the difference of width A and the copy of A (A) meets the specifications.
If the difference falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.
6. Enter Machine Parameter mode. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <0>)
7 Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 018 to meet the specification.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, decrease value.
If the width A is longer than the standard, increase value.
changed in step 2.
5-139
FBS registration (side)
1.40
0.10
Test Chart
0.15
0.20
1.00
1.25
Edge of
the paper
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
and FBS zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.
Standard
Adjustment Tool
10 2.7 (mm)
Setting Range
5.29 5.29
(mm)
(0.2116 mm step)
3. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-02 on the FBS glass.
7. Adjust the setting of Machine Parameter 015 to meet the specification.
If the width A is shorter than the standard, increase value.
If the width A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
changed in step 2.
5-140
ADF registration (top)
1.25
1.00
0.20
0.25
0.75
Test Chart
0.15
0.30
0.55
A
0.10
1.40
Edge of the paper
and ADF zoom adjustments (vertical and horizontal) have been made.
Standard
Adjustment Tool
20 3.0 (mm)
Setting Range
10.76 10.76 (mm)
(0.084 7x 2 mm step)
3. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-15 A3 on the ADF.
changed in step 2.
5-141
ADF registration (bottom)
2000-15
Test Chart
No.200-15 A3
A
Standard
Adjustment Tool
15 3.0 (mm)
Setting Range
10.67 10.67 (mm)
(0.0847 x 2 mm step)
changed in step 2.
5-142
ADF registration (side)
1.40
0.10
Test Chart
0.15
0.20
1.00
1.25
Edge of
the paper
0.75
0.25
0.55
0.30
Standard
Adjustment Tool
20 3.3 (mm)
Setting Range
5.29 5.29
(mm)
(0.2116 mm step)
changed in step 2.
5-143
5.3.4 Zoom adjustment
FBS zoom adjustment (Vertical)
have been made.
Zoom ratio
100 %
Standard
330 2.0 (mm)
(330 0.6 %)
Adjustment Tool
Setting Range
1.5 to 1.5 %
(0.1 % step)
1. Load A3 size paper to the first cassette.
2. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-15 A3 on the FBS.
3. Make two copies on paper in the 1st cassette with 100 % magnification.
4. Measure the length of A on the second copy to find the difference.
If length A falls outside the standard range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.

6. Adjust so that the setting of Machine Parameter 435 meets the specification.
If length A is shorter than the standard, increase value.
If length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
5-144
FBS zoom adjustment (Horizontal)
have been made.
Zoom ratio
100 %
Standard
240 1.4 (mm)
(240 0.6 %)
Adjustment Tool
Setting Range
1.5 to 1.5 %
(0.1 % step)
2. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-15 A3 on the FBS.
If length A falls outside the specified range, perform the following steps to make the adjustment.

If the length A is shorter than the standard, increase value.
If the length A is longer than the standard, decrease value.
5-145
ADF zoom adjustment (Vertical)
Note: Note: This adjustment must be made after the adjustments of printer registration (top and side) of the 1st
cassette have been made.
Zoom ratio
Standard
Adjustment Tool
100 %
1.0 %
Setting Range
6.3 to 6.3 %
(0.1 % step)

6. Adjust so that the setting of Machine Parameter 430 meets the specification.
5-146
ADF zoom adjustment (Horizontal)
have been made.
Zoom ratio
Standard
Adjustment Tool
100 %
1.0 %
Setting Range
1.5 to 1.5 %
(0.1 % step)
2. Place the Muratec Test Chart No. 2000-15 A3 in the ADF.

5-147
5.3.5 Separation pressure adjustment

Adjust the separation pressure using a screwdriver.
Rotate the screw by half-turn.

Rotate direction
Separation pressure
Clockwise
Up
Counterclockwise
Down
5-148
5.3.6 ADF skew adjustment

Adjust the resist roller by changing the position of the holder resister.
1. Remove the Guide Outer A and take out the Holder Resister.
Holder Register
Guide Outer A
2. Reattach the Holder Resister with its direction up-side-down.
Direction B
Normal
position
Adjustment
position
Direction A

3. Loosen the screw of the Holder Resister and adjust its position.
Tighten the screw after the adjustment.
When the Holder Resister is moved to direction A: The Copies will rotate to the clockwise direction.
When the Holder Resister is moved to direction B: The Copies will rotate to the counterclockwise
direction.
5-149
5.3.7 Drum ATDC adjustment

Important : When the Main PCB is replaced or All RAM Clear is performed for other reasons, the
ATDC value and drum life should be reentered.
Note : Before replacing the Main PCB or perform the All RAM Clear operation, be sure to see the Life
Monitor to write down the machine condition. (Press <Menu>, <*>, <0>, <9> and press [Enter])
For more information about Life Monitor see section 3, "Life Monitor".
1. After the All RAM clear operation (when the machine is restarted), the following message will be
displayed.
2. Press either [Manual] or [Auto].

3. If you have pressed [Auto], wait about six minutes until the machine adjust the ATDC value itself.
When the adjustment is over, go to step 10.
4. If you have pressed [Manual] the following screen will be displayed:
5. Select ASTD and press [Enter].

6. Enter the ASTD value, and press [Enter].
7. Select DeltaVCONT and press [Enter].

8. Enter the DeltaVCONT value, and press [Enter].
9. Press [Close] to exit the mode.

10. Enter the life monitor value using the Life Monitor Maintenance mode. (Press <Menu>,
<*>, <2>,
<0> and enter the values.) For more information about Life Monitor Maintenance mode, see section
3.
5-150
6 Section 6 Options
CAUTION: This installation should be done by a qualified service technician.
6.1 Paper cassette

The way to attach the second cassette to the MFP, and the third or fourth cassette to the seccond or
the third is almost the same.
Here the procedures are explained with the second cassette attaching to the MFP.
Note: Do not lift the machine by using anything other than the handles. Doing so may damage the
unit.
6.1.1 Packaging contents:

1. Optional paper cassette.................................... 1
2. Fixing plates..................................................... 4
3. Screws . ........................................................... 8
4. Paper size label ............................................... 1
5. Installation Instruction....................................... 1
6-1
6.1.2 Installation
1. Turn the machine off and unplug the power cord.
2. Set the machine on top of the optional cassette.
(To attach the third cassette or fourth cassette to the second or third cassette, set it on the counterpart.)
Option cassette
3. Remove four screws and the Cover Rear of the optional cassette.
4. Remove one screw and the Plate Printer C from the MFP back side.
5. Slide the harness through the machine and attach the connector of the PCB Main (P23).
Plate printer C
ADG01
3)
ADG01
4)
Harness
ADG01
3)
ADG01
3)
Cover rear
ADG01
3)
*Attaching the third cassette or fourth cassette to the second or third cassette.
Option cassette (2nd)
Cover rear (2nd)
Harness
Option cassette (3rd)
Cover rear (3rd)
6. Reattach the covers removed in steps 3 and 4.

Note: Make sure the harness is not wedged into the machine.
6-2
7. Open the first cassette and attach the fixing plates on both ends of the machine using each two
screws.
8. Attach the fixing plates on the backside of the machine on both ends using each two screws.
Fixture
ADG01
7)
ADG01
8)
9. Open the paper cassette and load the paper into the cassette.
10. Adjust the rear and side paper guides to the paper.
11. Turn the paper size dial to indicate the paper size.
12. Close the cassette.

13. Plug the power cord and turn on the machine.
14. If you have set the dial to Others in step 11, press <Menu>, <3>, [Enter] and select Other paper
and press [Enter]. Select the cassette you are going to set the paper size, press [Enter], select the
paper size and press [Enter].
15. Apply the correct paper size label and the cassette number label to the cassette.
The paper size labels are supplied with the optional cassette. The cassette number label is supplied
with the MFP.
6-3
6.2 Conformation Stamp

About 30,000 times stamp is available with blue ink stamp, 10,000 times with pink ink stamp.

1. Stamp solenoid................................................. 1
2. Stamp............................................................... 1
3. Screw................................................................ 1
6.2.2 Installation
1. Open the cover platen.
2. Peel off the left side of the Sheet document press.
3. Turn the Bracket stamp out and attach the stamp solenoid using one screw.
4. Connect the harness to the connector.
Solenoid
AFF01
3)
Bracket stamp
5. Remove the stamp cap from the stamp and insert it to the solenoid.
6. Turn the stamp unit back to the platen cover.

7. Reattach the Sheet document press.
8. Close the platen cover.
6-4
6.3 Page Counter

The mechanical counter shows the total number of pages the machine has printed.
Note: This device counts up to 999,999 pages. If more pages are printed, the counter resets to zero
and begins counting the new pages from that point.

1. Mechanical counter ......................................1
2
. Installation Instruction....................................1
6.3.2 Installation
2. Open the front cover.
3. Use nippers and open the cover.
4. Pull out the harness and connect it to the counter.
5. Tuck the harness into toe machine and set the counter to the opening.
6. Close the front cover.
Counter
The counter will now count
the number of
pages
printed.
6-5
6.4 PCL printer controller

1. PCL printer board..........................................1
2. PCB Joint.......................................................1
3. PCB spacer...................................................1
4. Stud spacers..................................................2
5. Spacers.........................................................4
6. Screw .............................................................. 5
7. Soft key laber .................................................. 1
8
. Setup Disk........................................................ 1
(
C
ontains PCL and TWAIN drivers
and manuals)
6.4.2 Installation
1. Turn the power off and unplug the power cord.
2. If the machine has an ADF, remove one screw and plate printer B. Otherwise go to step 4.
3. Disconnect one connector.
4. Remove eleven screws and the plate printer A.
5. Attach one PCB spacer.
6. Attach two stud spacers.
7. Attach the PCL printer board and screw it using three screws.
Stud spacer
PCB spacer
PCL PCB
6-6
8. Attach two spacers to the Main PCB.

9. Attach two spacers to the PCL printer board.
10. Attach the Joint PCB to the PCL printer board and Main PCB, and screw it using two screws.
11. Reattach the parts that was removed in steps 2 to 4.
*Use the enclosed CD to install the print drivers.
ADA02
7)
Spacer
PCB joint
6-7
6.5 OfficeBridge Expansion kit

1. OfficeBridge board.........................................1
2. Spacers.........................................................2
3. Screws...........................................................4
4. Soft key label ................................................1
5. Caution label for power off ...........................1
6. Setup Disk.....................................................1 (
C
ontains OfficeBridge programs
and manuals)
7.
Installation Instruction....................................1
Note: To connect the machine to the network a 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX LAN cable (Category 5)
is required.
6.5.2 Installation
5. Remove two screws and Cover side L Sub.
6. Use nippers to punch out the cover for network connection.
7. Reattach the Cover side L Sub.
Cover side L sub

ADA03
2)
8. Attach two spacers to the PCB Main.

9. Attach the OfficeBridge board and screw it using four screws.
PCB main
ADA02
6)
Network Interface Board
Spacer
ADA02
6)
6-8

11. Attach the caution label at the power switch.
*Refer to the setup guide how to set up OfficeBridge.
6-9
6.6 Network Interface Board

1. Network Interface Board . .............................1
2. Spacers.........................................................2
3. Screws...........................................................4
4. Installation Instruction....................................1
Note: To connect the machine to the network a 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX LAN cable (Category 5) is
required.
6.6.2 Installation
5. Remove two screws and Cover side L Sub.
6. Use nippers to punch out the cover for network connection.
7. Reattach the Cover side L Sub.
Cover side L sub

ADA03
2)
8. Attach two spacers to the PCB Main.

9. Attach the Network Interface Board and screw it using four screws.
PCB main
ADA02
6)
Network Interface Board
Spacer
ADA02
6)

11. Connect one end of a LAN cable to the Network Interface Board.
12. Plug the other end of the LAN cable into the 10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet hub.
13. Plug the power cord and turn the power on. Go ahead to the Network settings.
6-10
Network Settings
To use the machine on a network, set the IP address and Subnet mask on the machine.
There are two ways of settings according to the network environment:

Automatic setup; If a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server is installed on
your network, the IP address and Subnet mask is assign automatically to
the machine when the machine is turned.
Important: O
nce the DHCP server has assigned the IP address to your
machine, that IP address MUST be reserved within the specific
DHCP scope. Failure to do so could result in failed operation
when the IP address lease expires.
Manual setup
; If a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server is NOT installed

on your network, see the steps below and set up the IP address and Subnet mask.
1. Press <Menu>, <7>, <2>, <3> and [Enter].
2. If the password is registred, enter the password and press [Enter].
Otherwise, go to step 3.

3. Select IP Address and press [Enter].

4. Select DHCP Setting and press [Enter].

5. Select Off and press [Enter].
6. Select IP address and press [Enter].
7. Enter the IP address using the numeric keys and press [Enter].
8. Select Subnet mask and press [Enter].
9. Enter the Subnet mask using the numeric keys and press [Enter].
6-11
6.7 Scanner heater

1. Scanner heater .............................................1
2. Sheet heater..................................................1
3. Screw.............................................................1
6.7.2 Installation
5. Remove the Cover platen.
6. Remove the Cover left top and Cover right top.
7. Remove the Cover size H and Cover back top.
Size H cover
Back top cover

Right top cover
Left top cover
8. Remove the Pane.

9. Attach the scanner heater using one screw.
10. Remove one screw from the Supporter FPC and thread the harness of the heater under the supporter.
11. Thread the harness through the opening in the machine frame.
AFF01
8)
Tape
Heater
AFF01
9)
Supporter FPC
6-12
12. Connect the harness to the Scanner PCB (P149).
P149
PCB Scanner
13. Reattach the screw that was removed in step 8.

14. Reattach all the covers and the pane that were removed.
15. Put the Sheet document on the bottom side of the FBS.
Heater sheet
6-13
6.8 Cassette heater

1. Heater . ............................................................ 1
2. AC Inlet . .......................................................... 1
3. AC power . ....................................................... 1
4. Chassis cover .................................................. 1
5. Screw (A) . ....................................................... 1
6. Screw (B) . ....................................................... 1
7. Cable Ties ....................................................... 1
8. Label . .............................................................. 1
9. Installation Instruction . .................................... 1
6-14
6.8.2 Installation
2. Open the rear cover of the second, third or fourth cassette.
3. Open the left cover of the second, third or fourth cassette.
4. Attach the chassis cover to the cassette-chassis using two screws (screw A).
5. Insert the heater from the rear side of the cassette. Make sure that the heater mounts on the cassette-chassis on the front side of the casette.
6. Attach the heater using one screw (screw A) from the front side of the cassette.
7. Attach the heater using two screws (screw A) from the rear side of the cassette.
6-15
8. Attach the AC inlet to the cassette-chassis using two screws (screw A).
A
A
9. Attach the cable ties to the cassette-chassis.
10. Attach the ground wire to the cassette-chassis using one screw (screw B).
11. Connect the connectors.

12. Tie the cable to the cable tie and cut the rest of the ties off.
13. Use nippers to punch out the cover for AC inlet and reattach the cover.
14. Reattach the rear cover.

15. Attach the label to the rear cover.
16. Plug the non-pronged end of the supplied power cord into the power socket.
6-16
17. Plug the pronged end into a properly grounded electrical outlet.
6-17

MFX-2200 &amp; MFX-2700

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

MFX-2200 &amp; MFX-2700

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Muratec

MURATA MACHINERY, LTD

4.4 Document Feeder Jam...................................................................................................................4-3

5 Maintenance & Adjustment......................................................................5-1

and MFX-2200 are

bed scanner and Group 3 and

1.1.1 Parts names and descriptions

Auto Documet Feeder (ADF)

20 Paper loading guide

Paper output area

External telephone line jack

Effective Scanning width

Recording paper capacity

Receive paper tray

Simplex print : 27 ppm

(When loading A4-sized paper from 1st paper cassette.)

coverage under 3-pages interval printing.)

coverage under 3-pages interval printing.)

(140 432 mm) (Width x

(LEF), B5, B5(LEF)

2.1 Document Scanning Sequence

Document detection (ADF)

Detects whether there is a document

Detects the length of the document on

2.1.2 FBS section

Exposure Section: Construction and Function

Scanner frame Moving Mechanism

Document size detection (FBS)

Multi Beam Sensor

: Means that the unit is used.

2.2 Recording Section

2.3 Image Processing

The image processing is roughly divided into the following steps:

2.3.1 LED exposure

2.3.2 Drum Cartridge

2.3.3 Drum charge

2.3.5 Cleaning the OPC drum

2.3.6 Toner Cartridge

Toner cartridge structure

Toner agitator paddle

Toner hopper structure

Waste Toner collection

Toner transferring mechanism

2.3.7 Image Transfer

The toner image transferred on to the paper is securely fixed.

2.3.9 Paper supply

Paper feed roller

Thermal cut off

Thermal cut off

Moscow Cable Diagram

PCB NCU DAA

PCB CONN PCL

PCB DPRAM I/F

PCB EXT LINE 2

FLASH WRITER JIG

PCB NCU DAA

FBS MOTOR (Bi HB)

ADF MOTOR (Bi HB)

2.4 Interconnect Block Diagram

Paper eupty sensor(2,3 CAS)

Jam access cover sensor(2,3,4)

Lift up(1st) (A3)

Paper empty sensor(1st CAS)

DUP JAM SENSOR(A3)

MFX-2200 & MFX-2700

MFX-2200 & MFX-2700